Home

Notice - PLANET Technology Corporation.

1. PLANET 24 Port Gigabit Managed Switch T E E a E i A i sci oe y di a li i i 1234567 8 8 wile Takpe mini GBIC LNKACT PWR ye MHS 1 HT He 10 20 2 aji YX E E E Y z a im EE y E im e lt a WGSW 24020 ie Foon 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 23 24 a Figure 2 1 WGSW 24020 front panel un 1 q o3 Cj os oe D7 Os Os 10 dan Or ds ow 015 Ot ov 18 oe ae aa 022 a 04 Console wo A 222822282 op oe Os oe oy oe of Ds E D2 Geos PANET e So dlu da dia da dia dia da da da dia dia di da diu diu dia da ila dia dia dia dia el m OOL Og MMDD O yf WGSW 48040 48 Port Gigabit Managed Switch a B m Figure 2 2 WGSW 48040 front panel 18 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 2 1 3 LED Indications 2 1 3 1 WGSW 24020 LED Indications E System p Color Function PWR Green Lights to indicate that the Switch has power nm Per Per 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 port SFP interfaces Shared with 10 100 1000Base T Port 12 and Port 24 LED Color Function Lights to indicate the link through that port is successfully established LNK ACT Blink i
2. Set Time Use System Time O Use SNTP Time Local Time 04 Hours 17 Minutes 11 Seconds 01 Month 01 Day 00 Year Time Zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London Daylight Saving Daylight Saving USA European Custom Time Set Offset Min From DD MM YY HH MM To DD Mmy YY HH MM Recurring From Day Week Month Time HH MM To Day Week Month Time HH MM SNTP Servers Serverl Server2 SNTP Polling Interval 60 86400 sec 1024 Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 8 Switch Time screen The Time page includes the following fields mE Set Time Use System Time Specifies that the system time is not set by an external source but the Local time settings Use SNTP Time Specifies that the system time is set via an SNTP server E Local Time 33 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Hours Minuntes Seconds Defines the system time The field format is HH MM SS for example 21 15 03 Month Day Year Time Zone m Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Time Set Offset From To Recurring From Defines the system date The field format is Day Month Year for example 04 May 2007 The difference between Greenwich Mean Time GMT and local time For example the Time Zone Offset for Paris is GMT 1 while the local time in Taipei is GTM 8 Enables the Daylight Savings Time DST on the device based on the devices location The possible field values are e USA The
3. User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 25 TACACS Commands 5 25 1 tacacs server host The tacacs server host command in global configuration mode specifies a TACACS host To delete the specified name or address use the no form of this command Syntax tacacs server host ip address hostname single connection port port number timeout timeout key keystring source source priority priority no tacacs server host p address jjp address Name or IP address of the host An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines hostname Hostname of the tacacs server Range 1 160 characters single connection Specify single connection Rather than have the device open and close a TCP connection to the daemon each time it must communicate the single connection option maintains a single open connection between the device and the daemon port number Specify a server port number If unspecified the port number defaults to 49 Range 0 65535 timeout Specifies the timeout value in seconds If no timeout value is specified the global value is used Range 1 1000 key string Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all TACACS communications between the device and the TACACS server This key must match the encryption used on the TACACS daemon If no key string value is specified the global value is used Range Up to 160 characters
4. Figure 4 82 Factory Default screen 4 12 12 Server Logs The Global Log Parameters page contains fields for enabling logs globally and fields for defining log parameters The Severity log messages are listed from the highest severity to the lowest Event messages have a unique format as per the SYSLOG RFC recommended message format for all error reporting For example Syslog local device reporting Messages are assigned a severity code and include a message mnemonic which identifies the source application generating the message Messages are filtered based on their urgency or relevancy The severity of each message determines the set of event logging devices to which are sent for each event logging device The following table contains the Log Severity Levels User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Severity Type Severity Description Example Level Emergency 0 The system is not functioning Memories overflow Alert 1 The system needs immediate Main system memory attention pool overflow Critical 2 The system is in a critical state Cannot bind to SNMP Error 3 A system error has occurred Failed to delete entry Warning 4 A system warning has occurred Port down Notice 5 The system is functioning properly Bad route but system notice has occurred Informational 6 Provides device information Link up Debug 7 Provides detailed information about Method list created the log If a Debug error occur
5. 45 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 5 Statistics The Statistic of the switch this field includes these parts as below 4 5 1 RMON Statistics The RMON Statistics screen refer to figure 4 18 contains fields for viewing information about device utilization and errors that occurred on the device Interface Refresh Rate Drop Events Received Bytes Octets Received Packets Broadcast Packets Received Multicast Packets Received CRC amp Align Errors Undersize Packets Oversize Packets RMON Statistics onfig Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Mt Interface O pot a O La Refresh Rate No Refresh Y Drop Events D Received Bytes Octets 0 Received Packets 0 Broadcast Packets Received 0 Multicast Packets Received 0 CRC amp Align Errors o Undersize Packets 0 Oversize Packets 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 Collisions 0 Frames of 64 Bytes 0 Frames of 65 to 127 Bytes 0 Frames of 128 to 255 Bytes 0 Frames of 256 to 511 Bytes o Frames of 512 to 1023 Bytes 0 Frames of 1024 to 1632 Bytes 0 l Clear Counters Refresh Now Figure 4 18 RMON Statistics screen The page contains the following fields Indicates the device for which statistics are displayed The possible field values are e Port defines the specific port for which RMON statistics are displayed e LAG defines the specific LAG for which RMON statistics are displayed Defines the amount of time that pa
6. Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport general pvid 234 5 27 13 switchport general ingress filtering disable The switchport general ingress filtering disable interface configuration command disables port ingress filtering To enable ingress filtering on a port use the no form of this command Syntax switchport general ingress filtering disable no switchport general ingress filtering disable Default Configuration Ingress filtering is enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to enables port ingress filtering on e8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport general ingress filtering disable 5 27 14 switchport general acceptable frame type taggedonly The switchport general acceptable frame type tagged only interface configuration command discards untagged frames at ingress To enable untagged frames at ingress use the no form of this command Syntax switchport general acceptable frame type tagged only no switchport general acceptable frame type tagged only User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration All frame types are accepted at ingress Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelin
7. Figure 4 3 Switch Web Main Screen Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the Switch management or manage the Switch by console interface Paw Notice t is recommended to use Internet Explore 6 0 or above to access WGSW Switch 28 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 1 Main Screen The Switch provide Web based browser interface for configuring and managing the Switch This interface allows you to access the Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage the Switch Main Functions Menu PLANET Moteles b Commonceton an a a a lt lt Port Link Status Sa aia a os Device Information System Name IP Address 192 168 125 lt 4 Main Screen Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DNS Servers Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 inti Address Mode Static Descri ption Base MAC Address 00 30 4F 24 02 01 System Information Serial Number Model Name WGSW 24020 Hardware Version 00 03 00 Boot Version 1 0 2 Firmware Yersion 1 0 0 34 System Location Guckam Cantact Ni Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 4 Switch Web Main Screen 1 Save Config Via the Web Management the administrator can setup the WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 by select the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 5 appears Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Secu
8. Syntax show ip interface ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number ethernet interface number Ethernet port number vlan vian id VLAN number port channel number Port channel number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays VLAN 1 configuration Console show ip interface vlan 1 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 10 5 arp The arp global configuration command adds a permanent entry in the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache To remove an entry from the ARP cache use the no form of this command Syntax arp ip_addr hw_adar ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number no arp ip_adar hw_adar ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number jjp_addr IP address or IP alias to map to the specified MAC address hw_addr MAC address to map to the specified IP address or IP alias ethernet interface number Ethernet port number vlan vian id VLAN number port channel number Port channel number Default Configuration By default ARP is disabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The software uses ARP cache entries to translate 32 bit IP addresses into 48 bit hardware addresses Because most hosts supp
9. 4 9 1 STP Status The STP Status screen see figure 4 47 describes the STP status on the device STP Status Spanning Tree State Disable Spanning Tree Mode Classic STP Bridge ID 32768 00 03 6d 30 57 00 Designated Root 32768 00 03 6d 30 57 00 Root Port o Root Path Cost o Root Maximum Age sec 20 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Topology Changes Counts o Last Topology Change OD 2H 59M 375 Figure 4 47 STP Status screen The page contains the following fields Spanning Tree State By which indicates if STP is enabled on the device Spanning Tree Mode By which indicates the STP mode by which STP is enabled on the device Bridge ID Where identifies the Bridge priority and MAC address Designated Root This indicates the ID of the bridge with the lowest path cost to the instance ID Root Port Where indicates the port number that offers the lowest cost path from this bridge to the Root Bridge It is significant when the Bridge is not the Root The default is 0 Root Path Cost Where the cost of the path from this bridge to the root 99 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Root Maximum Age This indicates the device Maximum Age Time The Maximum Age Time indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge waits before sending configuration sec messages The default max age is 20 seconds The range is 6 to 40 seconds Root Hello Time sec This indicates the device Hello Time The He
10. Enables or disables Ingress filtering on the port Ingress filtering discards packets which do not include an ingress port Indicates the LAG to which the VLAN is defined 43 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Port Mode VLAN Membership Frame Leave Untagged Access Belongs to a single untagged VLAN Tag PVID be removed Allowed to belongs to multiple untagged VLANs at Untagged General the same time Tag PVID be removed Allowed to belongs to multiple Tagged VLANs at Tagged Trunk the same time Tag PVID or Original VID be remained 4 4 3 Ports to VLAN The Ports to VLAN screen contains fields for configuring ports to a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the Create VLAN screen All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID The Ports to VLAN screen contains a Port Table for VLAN parameters for each port Ports are assigned VLAN membership by selecting and configuring the presented configuration options please refer to figure 4 16 Switch Port Mode Acceptable frame Type Membership Switch Part Made Acceptable frame type Membership PLANET SRS wa EE a j Config fanfia a LAN l v Ligabit gl gZ 93 g4 g gt gb gf g gY glU gil giZ 913 gl4 g15 glb gif g18 919 gZU gZ1 922 923 gz4 Access Trunk Leneral Tagged UnTagged Forbidden Exclude LAG 11 12 13 14 15 16 L7 Le Artes Trunk General Tagged UnTagged F
11. If the system is in basic mode then CoS is the default trust mode Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command can be used only in QoS basic mode Packets entering a quality of service QoS domain are classified at the edge of the QoS domain When the packets are classified at the edge the switch port within the QoS domain can be configured to one of the trusted states because there is no need to classify the packets at every switch within the domain Use this command to specify whether the port is trusted and which fields of the packet to use to classify traffic DSCP value 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 56 57 63 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Queue ID 12345678 For an inter QoS domain boundary the port can be configured to the DSCP trusted state and apply the DSCP to DSCP mutation map if the DSCP values are different between the QoS domains To return to the untrusted state use the no qos command to apply best effort service Example The following example configures the system in basic mode to DSCP trust state Console config qos trust dscp 5 17 9 qos trust I nterface The qos trust interface configuration command enables each port trust state while the system is in basic mode To disable the trust state on each port use the no form of this command Syntax qos trust no qos trust Default Configuration Each port is enabled while the system is in b
12. Local authenticates the user at the device level The device checks the user name and password for authentication RADIUS where authenticates the user at the RADIUS server TACACS which authenticates the user at the TACACS server None assigns none authentication method to the authentication profile User Name Displays the user name oe Password Specifies the new password The password is not displayed As it entered an corresponding to each character is displayed in the field Range 1 159 characters Confirm Password This confirms the new password The password entered into this field must be exactly the same as the password entered in the Password field Add to List f Use the button when you want to add the user configuration to the Local User s Table 4 12 2 Static Address A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and cannot be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table see figure 4 71 Static Address Interface MAC Address VLAN ID if O VLAN NAME Status Permanent ball Past Port Port LAG MAC Address LAN ID Address Table Sort Key Port v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 71 Static Address screen User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The page contains the following fiel
13. Management access class is enabled using access list mlist 5 14 PHY Diagnostics Commands 5 14 1 test copper port tdr The test copper port tdr privileged EXEC command diagnoses with TDR Time Domain Reflectometry technology the quality and characteristics of a copper cable attached to a port Syntax test copper port tdr interface interface A valid Ethernet port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines The port can only be tested if cable is connected to both sides User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The port under test should be shut down during the test unless it is a combo port with an active fiber port The maximum disatance VCT can function is 120 meters Examples The following example results in a report on the cable attached to port e3 Console test copper port tdr e3 Cable is open at 100 meters The following example results in a failure to report on the cable attached to port e4 Console test copper port tdr e4 Can t perform the test on fiber ports 5 14 2 show copper ports tdr The show copper ports tdr privileged EXEC command display the last TDR Time Domain Reflectometry tests on specified ports Syntax show copper ports tdr interface interface A valid Ethernet port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command M
14. hostname to ping Range 1 160 characters User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 packet_size Number of bytes in a packet The actual packet size is eight bytes larger than the size specified because the switch adds header information Range 57 1472 bytes packet_count Number of packets to send If 0 is entered it pings until stopped Range 1 65535 packets time_out Timeout in milliseconds to wait for each reply Range 1 65535 milliseconds Default Configuration The default packet size is 56 bytes The default packet count is 4 packets The default time out is 1 000 milliseconds Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines Press Esc to stop pinging Following are sample results of the ping command Destination does not respond lf the host does not respond a no answer from host message appears in 10 seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable Network or host unreachable The switch found no corresponding entry in the route table To ping an out of band IP address use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Examples The following example displays a ping to IP address 10 1 1 1 Console ping 10 1 1 1 64 bytes from 10 1 1 1 icmp_seq 0 time 11 ms 64 bytes from 10 1 1 1 icmp_seq 1 time 8 ms 64 bytes from 10 1 1 1 icmp_seq 2 time 8 ms 64 bytes from 10 1 1 1 icmp_seq 3 time 7 ms AC
15. show users Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Example The following example displays information about the active users Console show users Username Protocol Location Bob Serial John SSH 172 16 0 1 Robert HTTP 172 16 0 8 5 23 8 show sessions The show sessions command in EXEC mode lists the open Telnet sessions Syntax show sessions This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command Command Mode EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Console gt show sessions Connection Host Address Port Byte 1 Remote router 172 16 1 1 23 89 2 172 16 1 2 172 16 1 2 23 8 Field Description Connection Connection number Host Remote host to which the device is connected through a Telnet session User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Address IP address of the remote host Port Telnet TCP port number Byte Number of unread bytes for the user to see on the connection 5 23 9 show system The show system user EXEC command displays system information Syntax show system Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Com
16. v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 56 MSTP Interfance configuration screen User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 10 Multicast On this field included IGMP Snooping Bridge Multicast Forward All About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional da
17. Broadcast 7 Multicast 1 CRC Align Errors 0 Collisions 0 Undersize Pkts 0 Oversize Pkts 0 Fragments O Jabbers 0 64 Octets 98 65 to 127 Octets 0 128 to 255 Octets 0 256 to 511 Octets 0 512 to 1023 Octets 491 1024 to 1518 Octets 389 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description Dropped The total number of events in which packets are dropped by the probe due to lack of resources This number is not always the number of packets dropped it is the number of Octets Packets Broadcast Multicast CRC Align Errors Undersize Pkts Oversize Pkts Fragments Jabbers Collisions 64 Octets 65 to 127 Octets 128 to 255 Octets 256 to 511 Octets 512 to 1023 Octets 1024 to 1518 Octets User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 times this condition has been detected The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received The total number of good packets received and directed to the broadcast address This does not include multicast packets The total number of good packets received and directed to a multicast address This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address The total number of packets received with a length excluding
18. Current Status Reactivate Suspended LAG Operational Status Active Admin Auto Negotiation Enable w Current Auto Negotiation Admin Speed Current LAG Speed Admin Flow Control Disable v Current Flow Control PYE None w Select Ports gi g2 g3 g4 g5 g6 g7 g8 g9 g10 gli g12 g13 g14 g15 g16 g17 g18 g19 920 g21 922 923 g24 Port a E E E A A AAA AA AAA As AAA A EA Figure 4 12 Switch per Link Aggregation screen 4 3 3 LACP Aggregated Links can be manually setup or automatically established on the relevant links by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Aggregate ports can be linked into link aggregation port groups Each group is comprised of ports with the same speed set to full duplex operation the LACP screen contains fields for configuring LACP LAGs see figure 4 13 PLANET Port VLAN gt Spanning Setup Config Config Statistics ACL Security Qos Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Tree System Priority p LACP System Priority 1 65535 1 Port Priority Port gi ov LACP Port Priority a LACP Timeout Long Admin Key 0 Update LACP Port Table lt lt Previous 1 2 Next gt gt Port Admin Key Port Priority LACP Timeout 2 g2 0 1 Long 3 g3 0 1 Long 4 g4 0 1 Long 5 g5 0 1 Long 6 96 0 1 Long 7 97 0 1 Long 8 g8 o 1 Long 9 g9 0 1 Long 0 1 0 1 o 1 Figure 4 13 Switch LACP configuration screen The page contains the following fields 40 User s Manual of WGSW 24
19. Default Configuration The default for the device is disabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines You must use the crypto certificate generate command to generate the HTTPS certificate Example The following example enables the device to be configured from a browser Console enable ip https server User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 28 4 ip https port The ip https port global configuration command configures a TCP port for use by a secure web browser to configure the device To use the default port use the no form of this command Syntax ip https port port number no ip https port port number Port number for use by the HTTP server Range 0 65535 Default Configuration This default port number is 443 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the https port number to 100 Console enable ip https port 100 5 28 5 crypto certificate generate The crypto certificate generate global configuration command generates a HTTPS certificate Syntax crypto certificate generate key generate length key generate Regenerate SSL RSA key length Specifies the SSL RSA key length If unspecified length defaults to 1024 Range 512 2048 Default Configuration The Certificate and the SSL RSA key pairs do not exist Command Mode Gl
20. No multicast addresses are defined Command Mode Interface configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines If the command is executed without add or remove the command only registers the group in the bridge database Static 16 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 multicast addresses can only be defined on static VLANs Examples The following example registers the MAC address console config interface vlan 8 console config if bridge multicast address 0100 5e02 0203 The following example registers the MAC address and adds ports statically console config interface vlan 8 console config if bridge multicast address 0100 5e02 0203 add Ethernet g1 9 5 4 4 bridge multicast forbidden address The bridge multicast forbidden address interface configuration command forbids adding a specific multicast address to specific ports Syntax bridge multicast forbidden address mac multicast address ip multicast address add remove Ethernet interface list port channel port channel number list no bridge multicast forbidden address mac multicast address ip multicast address add Adds ports to the group remove Removes ports from the group mac multicast address MAC multicast address jp multicast address P multicast address interface list Separate non consecutive valid Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces hyphen is used to designate a ra
21. Port Description eee Eaa Speed Duplex MDI MDIX Pdo Type LAG PYE Detail gi Up v Down Detail g2 Up v Down Detail g3 Up v Down Detail g4 Up v Down Detail g5 Up v Down Detail g6 Up v Down Detail g7 Up Y Down Detail 98 Up Y up 1000m Full MDI Disable ON Detail g9 Up vj Down Detail gid Up v Down Detail gli Up Y Down Detail giz Up v Down Detail Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 9 Switch Port Settings screen The Port Settings screen contains the following fields Port Shows the port number You can click on the Detail button of the appropriate port G1 G2 to use an SFP module and the Detail button shows the Port Configuration Detail screen which include port description port type admin status current port status Description Click up the Detail button to make a brief description of the port Administrative Status When to choose the UP button the port can be accessed normally to choose the Down button the port will be taken offline Link Status Shows an active connection when you choose the UP button there is no active connection or the port has been taken offline by an Admiinistrator when you choose the Down button Speed Shows the connection speed of the port and the speed can be configured only when auto negotiation is disabled on that port Duplex The port duplex mode Full transmission occurs in both directions simultaneously or Half transmission occurs in only one direction at a time This m
22. There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cache Console clear arp cache 5 10 8 show arp The show arp privileged EXEC command displays entries in the ARP table Syntax show arp Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays entries in the ARP table User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console show arp ARP timeout 60000 Seconds Interface IP address HW address el 10 7 1 102 00 10 B5 04 DB 4B g2 10 7 1 135 00 50 22 00 2A A4 status Dynamic Static 5 11 LACP Commands 5 11 1 lacp system priority The lacp system priority global configuration command configures the system priority To reset to default use the no form of this command Syntax lacp system priority value no lacp system priority value Value of the priority Range 1 65535 Default Configuration The default system priority value is 1 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the system priority to 120 Console config lacp system priority 120 5 11 2 lacp port priority The lacp
23. Use the key string row command to specify the SSH public key row by row Each row must begin with the keystring row command This command is useful for configuration files UU encoded DER format is the same format in authorized_keys file used by OpenSSH Example The following example enters public key strings for SSH public key clients called bob Console config crypto key pubkey chain ssh Console config pubkey chain user key bob rsa Console config pubkey key key string rsa AAAAB3NzaC 1yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQCvT nRwPWI Al4kpqlw9GBRonZQZxjHKcqKL6rMIQ ZNXfZSkvHG QuslIZ 76ILMFT34v7u7ChFAE Vu4GRfpSwoQUvV35LqJJk671OU zfwOl1g kTwml75QR9gHujS6KWGN2QWXgh3ub8gDjTSq muSn Wd05iDX2IExQWu08licglkO2LYciz ZATrEU 9FJxwPiVQOjc KBXuROjuNg5nFYsY OZCkON W9a tnkm1shRE7Di71 w3fNiOA 6w9044t6 AINEICBCCA4YcF6zMzaT 1 wefWwx6f User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Rmt5nhhqdAtN 4oJfce166DqVX1gWmN ZNR4DY DvSzg0IDnwCAC8Qh Fingerprint a4 16 46 23 5a 8d 1d b5 37 59 eb 44 13 b9 33 e9 5 22 9 show ip ssh The show ip ssh privileged EXEC command displays the SSH server configuration Syntax show ip ssh Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the SSH server configuration Console show ip ssh SSH server enabled Port 22 RSA key was gen
24. White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE2 1 White Orange 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Orange 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straight Through and Crossover Cable Please make sure your connected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables into your network User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 A 3 Available Modules The following list the available Modules for WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 MGB GT SFP port 1000Base T Module MGB LX SFP port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module MGB L70 SFP port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 70KM MGB LA10 SFP port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm mini GBIC module 10KM MGB LA20 SFP port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm mini GBIC module 20KM MGB LA40 SFP port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm mini GBIC module 40KM 2081 A34030 001 C
25. source Specifies the source IP address to use for the communication If no source value is specified the global value is used priority Determines the order in which the servers will be used when 0 is the highest priority If unspecified defaults to 0 Range 0 65535 Default Configuration No TACAS host is specified Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Multiple tacacs server host commands can be used to specify multiple hosts If no host specific timeout key or source values are specified the global values apply to each host To define TACACS server on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Example The following example specifies a TACACS host Console config tacacs server host 172 16 1 1 5 25 2 tacacs server key The tacacs server key command in global configuration mode sets the authentication encryption key used for all TACACS communications between the device and the TACACS daemon To disable the key use the no form of this command Syntax tacacs server key key string no tacacs server key key string Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all TACAS communications between the router and the TACACS server This key must match the encryption used on the TACACS daemon Range Up to 160 characters Default Configuration Empty string Command Mode Global Configu
26. 1 65535 interval seconds The number of seconds in each polling cycle If unspecified defaults to 1800 Range 1 3600 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines This command cannot be executed on multiple ports using the interface range ethernet command Example The following example enables a Remote Monitoring RMON MIB history statistics group on port e8 with the index number 1 and a polling interval period of 2400 seconds Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if rmon collection history 1 interval 2400 5 19 3 show rmon collection history The show rmon collection history user EXEC command displays the requested history group configuration Syntax show rmon collection history ethernet interface port channel port channel number interface Valid Ethernet port port channel number Valid port channel trunk index User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays all RMON group statistics Console show rmon collection history Index Interface Interval Requested Granted Owner Samples Sample 1 1 1000 50 50 CLI The following table descr
27. 10 1 1 1 PING Statistics 4 packets transmitted 4 packets received 0 packet loss round trip ms min avg max 7 8 11 Console gt 5 23 2 traceroute The traceroute User EXEC command discovers the routes that packets will actually take when traveling to their destination User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax traceroute p address hostnme size packet_size ttl max ttl count packet_counf timeout time_ouf source p address tos tos p address P address of the destination host An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines Range 1 160 characters hostname Hostname of the destination host Range Valid IP Address size packet_size Number of bytes in a packet Range 40 1500 ttl max ti The largest TTL value that can be used The traceroute command terminates when the destination is reached or when this value is reached Range 1 255 count packet_count The number of probes to be sent at each TTL level Range 1 10 timeout fime_out The number of seconds to wait for a response to a probe packet Range 1 60 source p address One of the interface addresses of the device to use as a source address for the probes The device will normally pick what it feels is the best source address to use Range Valid IP Address tos tos The Type Of Service byte in the IP Header of the packet Range 0 255 Default C
28. 112147483647 01287 Alert 26TFTP A TftpRXERROR An error message was received 2 2000 01 12 05 Clear Logs v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 85 Flash Logs screen User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 COMMAND STRUCTURE The WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 is a managed Ethernet Switch that can be controlled by the RS 232 console interface telnet interface and Web interface This chapter describer how to configure the Switch through these interfaces When you are ready to configure the smart functions of the Switch make sure you had connected the supplied RS 232 serial cable to the RS 232 port at the front panel of your WGSW 24010 Switch and your PC 5 1 Connect to PC s RS 232 serial port Hyper Terminal In Windows 98 2000 XP launch HyperTerminal create a new connection and adjust settings as below 7 Baud per second 38400 Data bits 8 Parity None 7 Stop bits 1 7 Flow Control None Port Settings Bits per second ass00 y Data bits la H Parity None y Stop bits hy Flow control Restore Defaults Cancel Apply User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 2 Using the CLI 5 2 1 CLI Command Modes The Command Line Interface CLI syntax conventions and terminology are described in this section Each CLI command is illustrated using the structure outlined below Introduction To assist in configuring devices the CLI command line interface is di
29. AYT Ctrl shift 6 u Erase Line EL At any time during an active Telnet session the Telnet commands can be listed by pressing the Ctrl shift 6 key followed by a question mark at the system prompt Ctrl shift 6 A sample of this list follows The following example displays the system service tag information User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console gt Ctrl shift 6 Special telnet escape help Esc B sends telnet BREAK Esc C sends telnet IP Esc H sends telnet EC Esc O sends telnet AO Esc T sends telnet AYT Esc U sends telnet EL Several concurrent Telnet sessions can be opened and switched between them To open a subsequent session the current connection needs to be suspended by pressing the escape sequence Ctrl Shift 6 and x to return to the system command prompt Then open a new connection with the telnet command If you want to login to host on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Keywords Table Options lecho quiet source interface stream Ports Table Keyword bgp chargen cmd daytime discard domain echo exec finger Description Enables local echo Prevents onscreen display of all messages from the software Specifies the source interface Turns on stream processing which enables a raw TCP stream with no Telnet control sequences A stream connection does not process Telnet options and can be appropriate fo
30. Console config macl permit ethernet g1 Console config macl permit ethernet g2 Console config macl exit Console config management access class mlist The following example shows how to create an access list called mlist configure all interfaces to be management interfaces except interfaces ethernet g1 and ethernet g9 and make the access list the active list Console config management access list mlist Console config macl deny ethernet g1 Console config macl deny ethernet g2 Console config macl permit Console config macl exit Console config management access class mlist User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 13 2 permit management The permit management access list configuration command defines a permit rule Syntax permit ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number out of band eth oob interface service service permit ip source p address mask mask prefix length ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number out of band eth oob interface service service ethernet interface number A valid Ethernet port number vlan vian id A valid VLAN number port channel number A valid port channel number p address Source IP address Range Valid IP Address mask mask Specifies the network mask of the source IP address Range Valid subnet mask mask prefix length Specifies the number of bits
31. IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and Back pressure IEEE 802 3ad Port trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1d Spanning tree protocol IIEEE 802 1w Rapid spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE Operating Temperature 0 C 50 C Storage Temperature 40 C 70 Operating Humidity 5 to 90 relative humidity non condensing Storage Humidity 5 to 90 relative humidity non condensing 17 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 2 INSTALLATION This section describes the functionalities of the Switch s components and guides how to install it on the desktop or shelf Basic knowledge of networking is assumed Please read this chapter completely before continuing 2 1 Product Description The PLANET WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 is a 24 48 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 2 4 shared SFP interfaces Gigabit Ethernet Switch lt boasts a high performance switch architecture that is capable of providing non blocking switch fabric and wire speed throughput as high as 48Gbps and 96Gbps Its two four built in GbE uplink ports also offer incredible extensibility flexibility and connectivity to the Core switch or Servers 2 1 1 Product Overview PLANET WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 is loaded with powerful traffic management and QoS features to enhance services offered by teleco
32. Multiple Hosts Frequency oe Violations Not in auto mode Not in auto mode Discard Not in auto mode Discard Not in auto mode Discard Not in auto mode Discard Not in auto mode Discard Not in auto mode Discard Not in auto mode Discard Not in auto mode Discard Not in auto mode Discard Not in auto mode Single Discard Not in auto mode Port is down or not present Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 35 Multiple Hosts screen The Page contains the following fields Port Displays the port number for which advanced port based authentication is enabled Enable Multiple Hosts When checked indicates that multiple hosts are enabled Multiple hosts must be enabled in order to either disable the ingress filter or to use port lock security on the selected port Action on Violation This defines the action to be applied to packets arriving in single host mode from a host whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address The possible field values are e Discard which discards the packets This is the default value e Forward by which forwards the packet e DiscardDisable discards the packets and shuts down the port The ports remains shut down until reactivated or until the device is reset Enable Traps When checked indicates that traps are enabled for Multiple Hosts 80 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Trap Frequency Defines the time period by which traps are sent to the host The Trap F
33. The sntp broadcast client enable global configuration command enables the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP broadcast clients To disable the SNTP broadcast clients use the no form of this command Syntax sntp broadcast client enable no sntp broadcast client enble This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Disabled Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines The sntp broadcast client enable interface configuration command enables the device to receive broadcast transmissions globally and on ALL interfaces Use the sntp client enable interface configuration command to enable sntp client on specific interface Examples The following example enables the SNTP broadcast clients 17 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console config sntp broadcast client enable 5 5 10 sntp anycast client enable The sntp anycast client enable global configuration command enables anycast client To disable the polling for SNTP broadcast client use the no form of this command Syntax sntp anycast client enable no sntp anycast client enable This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Disabled Command Mode Global configuration User Guidelines Polling time is determined by the sntp client poll timer global configuration command Use the sntp client enable interface configuration command to enable sntp client on specific interface Examp
34. User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 11 7 Notification Recipient The Notification Recipient screen see figure 4 68 and 4 69 contains information for defining filters that determine whether traps are sent to specific users and the trap type sent Notification Recipient Recipient IP Notification Type Traps y SNMPy1 2 Community String ui Notification Version SNMPv1 Y O SNMPy3 User Name e Security Level UDP Port 162 Filter Name w Timeout 15 sec Retries 3 Figure 4 68 Notification Recipient The page contains the following fields Recipient IP Which indicates the IP address to whom the traps are sent Notification Type Defines the notification sent The possible field values are Traps indicates traps are sent Informs indicates informs are sent SNMP v1 2 Enables SNMP v1 2 as the Notification Recipient Either SNMP v1 2 or SNMPv3 can be enabled at any one time but not both at the same time If String and Notification Version fields are enabled for configuration e Community String where identifies the community string of the trap manager e Notification Version determines the trap type The possible field values are SNMP V1 which indicates SNMP Version 1 traps are sent SNMP V2 which indicates SNMP Version 2 traps are sent SNMP V3 This enables SNMPv3 as the Notification Recipient Either SNMPv1 2 or SNMP V3 enabled at any one time but not both at the same
35. m Query Port Specifies the interface for which the table is queried There are two interface types from which to select e Port displays the specific port number e LAG displays the specific LAG number MAC Address Specifies the MAC address for which the table is queried User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 VLAN ID Specifies the VLAN ID for which the table is queried Address Table Sort Specifies the means by which the Dynamic MAC Address table is sorted by address VLAN or interface Key 4 12 4 Logging The System Logs enable viewing device events in real time and recording the events for later usage System Logs record and manage events and report errors or informational messages see figure 4 73 Logging Severity Memory Logs Flash Logs Emergency v Alert Critical SJ S S lt Error Warning Notice lt iS 4 5 lt lt Informational Debug v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 73 Loggin screen Event messages have a unique format as per the SYSLOG protocols recommended message format for all error reporting For example System logs and local device reporting messages are assigned a severity code and include a message mnemonic which identifies the source application generating the message It allows messages to be filtered based on their urgency or relevancy Each message s
36. vlan 1972 5 27 3 default vian disable The default vlan disable VLAN configuration command disables the default VLAN functionality Use the no form of this command to enable the default VLAN functionality Syntax default vlan disable no default vlan disable This command has no keywords or arguments Default Configuration Enabled Command Modes Vlan configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examplesl Console vlan database Console config vlan default vlan disable User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 27 4 interface vian The interface vlan global configuration command enters the interface configuration VLAN mode Syntax interface vlan vian id vian id The ID of an existing VLAN excluding GVRP dynamic VLANs Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the VLAN 1 IP address of 131 108 1 27 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 131 108 1 27 255 255 255 0 5 27 5 interface range vian The interface range vian global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode to configure multiple VLANs Syntax interface range vlan v an range all vian range A list
37. work station or personal computer and the system It also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics Management Access Overview Key Concepts Key Guidelines for Implementation Administration Console Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Management Access Overview The Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage the Switch using any or all of the following methods An administration console Web browser interface An external SNMP based network management application The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Advantages Disadvantages Console e No IP address or subnet needed Must be near switch or use dial up connection Text based Not convenient for remote users e Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal built Modem connection may prove to be unreliable or slow into Windows 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP operating systems e Secure Web Ideal for configuring the switch remotely e Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP Browser Compatible with all popular browsers address and subnet mask Can be accessed from any location May encounter lag times on poor connections e Most visu
38. 65535 seconds Default Configuration 30 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets the time for the retransmission of packets to the authentication server to 3600 seconds console config if Config VLAN dot1x timeout supp timeout 3600 5 29 12 show dot1x User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The show dot1x privileged EXEC command displays 802 1X status for the switch or for the specified interface Syntax show dot1x ethernet interface interface The full syntax is unit port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays 802 1X status for the switch console show dot1x 802 1x is disabled Admin Oper Reauth Reauth Port Mode Mode Control Period e1 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 e2 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 e3 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 e4 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 e5 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 e6 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 e7 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 e8 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 g1 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 g2 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 n a n
39. Authentication Port Number of Retries Timeout for Reply Dead Time Key String Source IP Address Usage Type The Authentication Server IP address Displays the server priority The possible values are 0 65535 where 1 is the highest value The RADIUS Server priority is used to configure the server query order Identifies the authentication port The authentication port is used to verify the RADIUS server authentication The authenticated port default is 1812 Defines the number of transmitted requests sent to RADIUS server before a failure occurs The possible field values are 1 10 3 is the default value This defines the amount of the time in seconds the device waits for an answer from the RADIUS server before retrying the query or switching to the next server The possible field values are 1 30 3 is the default value This defines the amount of time minutes that a RADIUS server is bypassed for service requests The range is 0 2000 The Dead Time default is 0 minutes This defines the default key string used for authenticating and encrypting all RADIUS communications between the device and the RADIUS server This key must match the RADIUS encryption Defines the source IP address that is used for communication with RADIUS servers Specifies the RADIUS server authentication type The default value is Login The possible field values are e Login indicates that the RADIUS server is used for authenticating user
40. Bridge The port priority value is provided in increments of 4096 For example 4096 8192 12288 etc The range is 0 to 65535 The default value is 32768 This specifies the device Hello Time The Hello Time indicates the amount of time in seconds a root bridge waits between configuration messages The default is 2 seconds The range is 1 to 10 seconds Where specifies the device Maximum Age Time The Maximum Age Time indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge waits before sending configuration messages The default max age is 20 seconds The range is 6 to 40 seconds This specifies the device forward delay time The Forward Delay Time indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge remains in a listening and learning state before forwarding packets The default is 15 seconds The range is 4 to 30 seconds User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 9 3 STP Port Settings Network administrators can assign STP settings to specific interfaces using the STP Interface Settings screen see figure 4 49 The STP Interface Settings page contains the following fields Spanning Interface O Port g1 LAG STP v Port Fast Disabled vw Port State Disabled Speed 1000M Path Cost 2000000 Default Path Cost Priority 128 J Designated Bridge ID NJA Designated Port ID NJA Designated Cost NjA Forward Transitions NJA Update Figure 4 49 STP Port Settings screen The page contains the f
41. Commands ACLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet e5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and e5 specifies the port When entering commands the Giga ports are referred to with a prefix g and the 10 100 Mbps ports are referred to with a prefix e The ports are preceded by the unit number The unit number for a standalone device is 1 To enter commands that require parameters enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter console config username admin password smith When working with the CLI the command options are not displayed The command is not selected by a menu but is manually entered To see what commands are available in each mode or within an interface configuration the CLI does provide a method of displaying the available commands the command syntax requirements and in some instances parameters required to complete the command The standard command to request help is the There are three instances where the help information can be displayed Keyword lookup tThe character is entered in place of a command A list of all valid commands and corresponding help messages are displayed Partial keyword lookup A command
42. Date ald Despated ma moo tat WRK g14 Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000M 2000000 N A N A N A N A giS Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000M 2000000 E N A NJA N A NJA gl Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000M 2000000 128 N A N A N A N A gl Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000M 2000000 128 N A N A NjA N A gi8 Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000M 2000000 128 N A NJA N A NJA gi9 Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000M 2000000 128 N A NJA N A NJA g20 Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000m 2000000 128 N A NJA N A NJA g21 Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000M 2000000 128 N A N A N A N A g22 Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000M 2000000 128 N A NJA N A NJA g23 Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000m 2000000 128 N A NJA N A NJA g24 Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000M 2000000 128 N A NJA N A NJA Global System LAGs Designated Designated Port Port Path Port Designated Forward pio ER Fast State Role Cost Priority pridas 1D Cost Transitions LAGI Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 N A N A N A NjA LAG2 Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 NjA NjA NJA NJA LAG3 Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 N A Nia NJA NjA LAG4 Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 N A NjA NJA NjA LAGS Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 NJA NjA NJA N A LAG6 Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 NJA NjA NJA N A LAG Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 N A N A N
43. E AE AAE AA AN E aE E E A RES 36 4 3 2 Link AGgre gation snu a a dio 38 O EEAS TE AA EAE TASTE O ace uses T AT E T 40 4 4 VLAN Configuration reaa e a N E E dee ee nai i ee 41 4 41 Create VLAN voi o A cee ates 42 BAZ POM SO TING ts iovs ened scvarcnsgreccvaus E E E E E E E EE EE sve 43 4 473 Ponts tO V LAN 2 2 222 occa tee Sree ea Se ara tl cee Bae e ods Lhe cetera E Dh dl cz id acim tee 44 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 AAA GVRP iii 45 AID STALISTICS E oes O 46 4 51 RMON Salsa e oe tte fra fe ena enfe al doo Y 46 4 5 2 RMON read 47 4 5 3 RMON Alattm cc eee ae eth ee eee eed ee eed ee eed tee 49 4 54 RMON Events 0 A A Rr AR Aaa sla etna eieateie 51 455 Port WtiliZAtiOn circa tt ed eones 52 4 5 6 8021X StatiStiCs iia ita 53 4 5 7 GVRP Statistics iii is 54 A A ET 57 OM Based AGI uta ri A Inicio 57 4 6 2 IP Based ACL Configure Sample oooocconoccccnococcccnooocncnanonnno nono cocoa nn nr canon nn rro n nn anar rre rana r rn nn nn nn rr nan r ren nnnn nn anar nnnninns 60 4 6 3 MAC Based Alli ei 63 4 6 4 MAC Based ACL Configure Sample ooooccccnnnoccnnococonanoncnnnnno nono noncnc eea a akie kideak eeii rr nnnn nn anar nnncinns 65 APSO GUIINY incitar pt its 69 A ACEBIA dd A o IN a in Me eN ed 69 4 7 2 RAGUUS ea 70 A TS TAGACS E AAE SE EE Scion Sigel ages age a A a ee re ae a eae Ooi se OS 72 ATA BODA SOMOS ii dio ida 73 AA ia iat 78 4 7 6 Multiple Hosts enint tnne e a ee 80 4T T Storm Contolera n used ee eat dda
44. File Type in the name and path of the file or Browse to locate the upgrade file m Via HTTP See figure 4 80 Firmware Upgrade Next O via TFTP via HTTP Source File Browse Figure 4 80 Firmware Upgrade via HTTP Via HTTP Allows you to upgrade the firmware using your Web browser Source File Name Specifies the file to be downloaded Use the Proceed button to upgrade the firmware via TFTP or HHTP that be selected User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 12 10 Reboot The Reboot screen see figure 4 81 resets the device whose configuration is automatically saved before the device is rebooted Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 81 Reboot screen A Notice There is a known issue Sometimes after the Reboot button be pressed it costs lot time to stop the curent tasks So it might be rebooted after more then 5 minutes 4 12 11 Factory Defaults The Factory Reset screen see figure 4 82 allows network managers to reset the device to the factory defaults settings but if you restore factory defaults results in erasing the configuration file Although restoring the factory defaults will erase your configuration you can save a backup of your current configuration settings from the Admin Save Configuration screen PLANET etun Port config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security GoS Spanning Tree Multicast SAMP Admin Logout Factory Default Factory Default Save Config Cancel Config
45. From forwarding to disabled From disabled to blocking 94 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Switch Blocking v Listening gt Disable Learning Vv Forwarding STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root A Notice Bridge and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports 95 The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level Parameter Description User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Value Bridge Identi
46. Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures an access list called mlist as the management access list Console config management access class mlist 5 13 5 show management access list The show management access list privileged EXEC command displays management access lists Syntax show management access list name name Name of the access list If unspecified defaults to an empty access list Range Valid name Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the active management access list Console show management access list mlist permit ethernet g1 permit ethernet g9 Note all other access implicitly denied 5 13 6 show management access class User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The show management access class privileged EXEC command displays the active management access list Syntax show management access class Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the management access list information Console show management access class
47. Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example all multicast packets on port g8 are forwarded console config interface vlan 2 console config if bridge multicast forward all add ethernet g8 5 4 8 bridge multicast forbidden forward all The bridge multicast forbidden forward all interface configuration command forbids a port to be a forward allmulticast port To restore the default use the no form of the bridge multicast forward all command Syntax bridge multicast forbidden forward all add remove ethernet interface list port channel port channel number lish no bridge multicast forward all add Forbids forwarding all multicast packets remove Does not forbid forwarding all multicast packets interface list Separates non consecutive valid Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of ports port channel number list Separates non consecutive valid port channels with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of port channels Default Configuration By default this setting is disabled for example forwarding to the port is not forbidden Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines IGMP snooping dynamically discovers multicast router ports When a multicast router port is discovered all the multicast packets are forwarded to it unconditionally 16 User
48. N A Forward Transitions N A Remain Hops N A Update lt Previous 1 2 3 Next Port Port Path Designated Designated Designated Forward Remain Interface State TYPE Role priority Cost Bridge ID Port ID Cost Transitions Hops o1 NA O NJA NJA 128 2000000 g2 N A N A N A 128 2000000 NjA NjA NjA N A NjA g3 NjA N A NA 128 2000000 NjA NjA NjA NjA NjA g4 N A NA NA 128 2000000 NjA NjA N A N A N A g5 NjA NA NA 128 2000000 NjA N A N A NjA NjA g6 N A N A N A 128 2000000 NjA NjA NjA N A Nia a7 NjA N A N A 128 2000000 NjA NjA NjA N A Nia gs NjA N A NA 128 20000 NjA NjA NjA N A Nia 99 N A N A NIA 128 2000000 N A NjA N A N A NjA gio NjA NiA NA 128 2000000 NjA NjA N A N A NjA gil N A N A NA 128 2000000 NjA NjA NjA N A N A gi2 NjA NjA NjA 128 2000000 NjA NjA NjA N A N A x Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 55 MSTP Interfance Settings screen The MSTP Interface Settings screen contains the following fields Instance ID Interface Port State Type Role Interface Priority Lists the MSTP instances configured on the device Possible field range is 0 15 Indicates the interface for which the MSTP settings are displayed The possible field values are two types Port Specifies the port for which the MSTP settings are displayed LAG Specifies the LAG for which the MSTP settings are displayed where indicates whether the port is enabled for the specific instance indicates if the port is a point to point port or a port connected
49. Parameter Screen contains the following fields m SNMPV3 Local Engine ID Use Default Indicates the local device engine ID The field value is a hexadecimal string Each byte in hexadecimal character strings consists of two hexadecimal digits Each byte can be separated by a period or a colon The Engine ID must be defined before SNMPvV3 is enabled For stand alone devices select a default Engine ID that is comprised of Enterprise number and the default MAC address For a stackable system configure the Engine ID and verify that the Engine ID is unique for the administrative domain This prevents two devices in a network from having the same Engine ID Uses the device generated Engine ID It s defined per standard as First 4 octets first bit 1 the rest is IANA Enterprise number To locate the IANA Enterprise number by referring to the Vendor website or use the show SNMP command using a CLI interface User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The default Engine ID is based on the device MAC address Notification SNMP Notifications This indicates if the device can send SNMP notifications Authentication Notifications This indicates if SNMP Authentication failure notification is enabled on the device 4 11 2 Views SNMP Views provide access or block access to device features or feature aspects For example a view can be defined that states that SNMP Group A has Read Only R O access to Multicast groups while SNM
50. Remove Policer Name View Interface to Policy Cancel Config Figure 4 42 Advance Mode screen MAC ACLs and IP ACLs can be grouped together in more complex structures called policies Policies can be applied to an interface Policy ACLs are applied in the sequence they appear within the policy Only a single policy can be attached to a port In advanced QoS mode ACLs can be applied directly to an interface in the Security ACL Binding However a policy and ACL cannot be simultaneously applied to an interface After assigning packets to a specific queue services such as configuring output queues for the scheduling scheme or configuring output shaping for burst size CIR or CBS per interface or per queue can be applied Out of Profile DSCP Assignments this button opens up the DSCP Map screen See figure 4 43 88 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 DSCP In DSCP Out DSCP In DSCP Out DSCP In DSCP Out DSCP In DSCP Out o o 16 16 32 32 w 48 48 v 1 EE 17 147 e 33 33 A 49 49 2 2 18 18 w 34 34 v 50 50 w 3 19 35 51 4 4 x 20 20 36 36 52 52 w 5 5 ov 21 EN 37 37 53 53 v 6 6 R 22 2 38 38 54 54 w 7 7 23 23 w 39 39 55 55 v 8 8 v 24 24 w 40 40 56 56 iv 9 9 4 25 25 w 41 41 57 57 v 10 10 v 26 26 42 42 58 58 v 11 27 43 59 12 12 28 28 Y 44 44 Y 60 60 v 13 13 A 29 29 45 45 61 61
51. SNMP views Advanced Enables SNMP Advanced Mode for a selected community and contains the following fields Group Name defines advanced SNMP communities group names Add to List Use the button when you want to add the Communities configuration to the respective Table at the bottom of the screen Base Table Advanced Table E Base Table User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Communities A Management Station Community String Access Mode View Name All public Read Only Default 192 168 1 51 private Read Write Default Em Management Station Community String Group Name cua v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 66 Communities table screen The page contains the following fields Management Station Community String Access Mode View Name E Advanced Table Management Station Group Name Displays the management station IP address for which the basic SNMP community is defined Displays the password used to authenticate the management station to the device Where displays the access rights of the community Displays the user defined SNMP view Displays the management station IP address for which the basic SNMP community is defined Community String which displays the password used to authenticate the management station to the device Displays advanced SNMP communities group name User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 11 6 Notification Filter The Notification Filter screen see figur
52. Sages etek Deed aa codon Wa thee dec then He toe doscd heehee G iaa 81 AEB QOS ree seceded es aceadt Payee dnd 82 42851 COS SOUINGS ti A ide ache tes 82 4 8 2 QUEUE Sei seis te eee ie idea 84 RAS Mael tha ies hal obliged a SEE Se ASE gs be SESS dy cea 85 428A Banowidiliis sscrcesessoctsstb ol Alb 86 AI MOde ex vscce his de A ai 87 4 3 6 Advanced Modes i 3 sedan aie ei saan aan ne ee ee eee 88 4 9 SPANNING Ire chyebecdelara shoe beet N A lene ieee 93 49 1 STR Sal naaa cana daa 99 492 The Global OTP T A e A A 100 E Port Settings A A 102 4 94 RSTP Port settings ci casas 105 4 9 5 MSTP Properties iii a eli eet 106 49 6 MSTP Instamce Seti S ac secon a er reee e a a dd casusacicsysacceracsacedsaceddevasce lt gadaagd edeeserearnapenetesserees 107 4 9 7 MSTP Interface S ttingS iii yi ee a e i 109 ALTO MU di a Se ie A ES a a 111 4 101 IGMP SNOOPING scsvesserccesceessdscetpheqiceceesabeetevaeanetenadhcaapbcutacnescubestuvaecnseueachassbeqeusuee seeswbott agaaa piera aaia piaua 113 4 022 Bridge MUN aS a a E aaa aa aa ea a e A E e eaa eaa Eak 115 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 10 3 Bridge Multicast Forward All cc eeeecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeesaeeeseeaaeeeceeeeeeesnaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeesseeeesenaeeeenenaees 117 ATA SNMP er EAN EE EEE EE daeeb e Sete de 118 4 111 Global Parameters cia Geis ae deel ene ade ene Seton deel tee dete deli et 118 APTN E2 VICWS EEEE TEAS sei ans 119 4 11 3 Group Profile A ee
53. Spanning tree forward imMe ocacion E E ida 285 5 214 spanning tree hello tie iii ana iio 285 5 21 5 spanning tree MaX aGe xcs ts ccchesesconensasederorncecnessceeeenennsernepsgdedgetenesenageddaeguannesubersasedgeapesccnassasederepasdentesgecdertsnes 286 5 21 6 Spanning tree priority icawe eee wis ii ei We ele he as 287 5 21 7 Spanning tree disable aiii ad i 287 9 21 G SPANNING trSSCOSU matara pt ta lorena 288 5 21 9 SpanninG trSe pOREprIOTY sii A A ia 289 5 21 10spanning tree PU aiii iaa 289 5 21 11 Spanning tres linktype conicin riada 290 5 2112 5panning tree bpd tintai a dis ds 291 5 21 13 clear spanning tree detected protoCols ee eee ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeceneeeesenaeeeeeaeeeseneeeeesneeeeseaas 292 5 21 14 show SPANNING RE cece eid vine deed delenit settee en ete ied Maen hein vi beter ees 292 5 22 SSH and SLOGIN COMME iii o ida 294 5 221 P SSN PO dir 294 5 222 IP SSN SEVE T a a e a ea baat Soe eaa E aae E aE diego a ie a idad 295 5 22 3 crypto Key generate gSa carrai iaai i aa e E ii e aea aedd eaae ENE 296 5 22 4 crypto key generate ra aE A e a E A A E Aa Ea A AA aA EEE EN ri 296 22 5 1p Ssh pubkey lt UN iieiea Ai 297 5 22 6 crypto key pubkey chain SSN ooo eee ceeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeceeeaeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeceeeeeesenaeeseeaeeeseneeeeesneeeeneaas 297 9222 USET KOY si nein ei ena er A A i i ee 298 5 228 KOYy StriNG ss tavecsedera cc stoen best sgeila saben o id 299 5 229 SNOW Ip
54. Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp ld frames that have been received by this Authenticator The number of EAP Req ld frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq ld frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame The source MAC address carried carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame 5 29 15 dot1x auth not req The dot1x auth not req interface VLAN configuration command enables unauthorized users access to that VLAN Use the no form of this command to disable the access Syntax dot1x auth not req User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 no dot1x auth not req This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration User should be authorized to access the VLAN Command Mode Interface configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines To define a VLAN for authorized and unauthorized
55. Sui aa ie 300 5 22 10 ShowW crypto key My Pubkey isc A A a 301 5 22 11 show crypto key pubkey Chain SSN ooooocccnnoccccnonoccconononcnnnonnnc nono ncnnnnn cnn nan rn nr decti rr nnn rra rn nr nnn rre 301 5 23 System MANAGEMENT cinco 302 2321 PI de ld eee A e O 302 AA O O azuscuens AS 303 23 3 NA A a ie ee 306 ZA OU MO ii A A A A eee 308 9 23 o PA NO 309 529 0 POSAM Ea a A adela a 310 10 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5223 7 SNOW A ON 310 5 238 SNOW SCSSIONS cts 311 5 23 9 SNOW SYSLOM ei sess tanith Gert e e Genes NS 312 5 23 E VErSlOM A O OS 313 5 24 Syslog Command Sienen ea i a a eee i bd 313 524 1 logging Mia A cede Sates ede ia eRe eee 313 9 24 2 NS 314 5 24 35 IOGGING CONSOLE cai A a 315 IZA A logging Bleed A vee e cence beds edd b detec a dee sondendadsedeadin ste E eaea 316 24 5 logging DUTered SiO iii E ai aaa edades 316 5 24 6 Clear ogg NN criada 317 ELA aa 317 248 clear logging TM o iii A i a ee eee ae 318 5 24 9 SHOW lOGGING ivi A id needle ever 319 9 24 1 O SHOWAOQGING TGs oncceer eras abe tasntycaceeasszecchesscetehaxsctewsnsg ats ata T 320 524 11s SHOW SYSIOG SORVOLS e aaa a 321 5 25 TACACS Commands iii ci 322 5 25 tacacs ServerNOSt iu as 322 5 25 2 taCACS SEIVEF KEY scrris ctiee dente NS 323 5 25 3 tacacS Server IM diarios 323 5 25 4 tacacS Server SOUICEAID ii rie a 324 5 25 5 SHOW taca CSi i r A eek ce iat A ii eset 325 5 26 User Interface Command suicido peace 326 5 20 On
56. The possible field values are e Date The date at which DST ends The possible field range is 1 31 e Month The month of the year in which DST ends The possible field range is Jan Dec e Year The year in which the configured DST ends e Time The time at which DST starts The field format is Hour Minute for example 05 30 Defines the time that DST starts in countries other than USA or Europe where the DST is constant year to year The possible field values are Defines the time that DST begins each year For example DST begins locally every second Sunday in April at 5 00 am The possible field values are e Day The day of the week from which DST begins every year The possible field range is Sunday Saturday e Week The week within the month from which DST begins every year The possible field range is 1 5 e Month The month of the year in which DST begins every year The possible field 34 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 range is Jan Dec e Time The time at which DST begins every year The field format is Hour Minute for example 02 10 Defines the recurring time that DST ends each year For example DST ends locally every fourth Friday in October at 5 00 am The possible field values are e Day The day of the week at which DST ends every year The possible field range is Sunday Saturday e Week The week within the month at which DST ends every year The possible field range is 1 5 e M
57. To reset the mode to the appropriate default for the device use the no form of this command User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax switchport mode access trunk general no switchport mode access Port belongs to a single untagged VLAN trunk Port belongs to 1 4063 VLANs all tagged except optionally for a single native VLAN general Port belongs to 1 4063 VLANs and each VLAN is explicitly set by the user as tagged or untagged full 802 1Q mode Default Configuration All ports are in access mode and belong to the default VLAN whose VID 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures e8 as an untagged layer 2 VLAN interface Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport mode access 5 27 8 switchport access vian The switchport access vlan interface configuration command configures the VLAN ID when the interface is in access mode To reconfigure the default use the no form of this command Syntax switchport access vlan vian id no switchport access vlan vian id VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the port is configured Default Configuration VLAN ID 1 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet port channel mode User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines The command automa
58. VLAN 13 VLAN 14 o jo jol o oj ojf o o o fo o o o ojfo VLAN 15 Back Save Save amp close Close Figure 4 54 MSTP VLAN Instance Configuration screen Instance ID Defines the VLAN group to which the interface is assigned E Included VLANs Included VLAN Where maps the selected VLAN to the selected instance Each VLAN belongs to one instance m Instance Settings Bridge Priority Specifies the selected spanning tree instance device priority The field range is 0 61440 Designated Root Bridge ID which indicates the ID of the bridge with the lowest path cost to the instance ID Root Port Where indicates the selected instance s root port Root Path Cost Indicates the selected instance s path cost Bridge ID Indicates the bridge ID of the selected instance Remaining Hops Indicates the number of hops remaining to the next destination 4 9 7 MSTP Interface Settings User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Network Administrators can assign MSTP Interface settings using the MSTP Interface Settings screen see figure 4 55 GQ PLANET Meneosieg b Corman nally Port VLAN bara Spanning Setup Config Config ACL Security Qos Tree Multicast MSTP Interface Settings Instance ID 1 Interface OPort gl Y LAG Port State N A Type NjA Role N A Interface Priority 128 Path Cost 2000000 Use Default Designated Bridge ID N A Designated Port ID NjA Designated Cost
59. a RADIUS server is skipped over by transaction requests Range 0 2000 key Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the router and the RADIUS server This key must match the encryption used on the RADIUS daemon If no key value is specified the global value is used source Specifies the source IP address to use for the communication If no retransmit value is specified the global value is used 0 0 0 0 is interpreted as request to use the IP address of the outgoing IP interface An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines priority Determines the order in which the servers are used where 0 is the highest priority Range 0 65535 priority Determines the order in which the servers are used where 0 is the highest priority Range 0 65535 Default Configuration By default no RADIUS host is specified Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines To specify multiple hosts multiple radius server host commands can be used If no host specific timeout retransmit deadtime or key values are specified the global values apply to each host To define a radius server on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address The address type of the source parameter must be the same as the ip address parameter Example The following example specifies a RADIUS server host with the following char
60. a i ei 120 4 114 Group Membership estn morr si een ieee ena ii 121 ARTO COmMmMUNIES kikir nanpi aa aaa a aipa aa anaa aaia paoia apia oaie 123 4 11 6 Notification Filter Seiren a a A A ide 125 4 11 7 Notification Recipiente N a Ni 126 ALA e e do 128 4512 User Authentic iii ins 128 PA o EA 129 4 12 3 Dynamic AE siii 131 4 124 LOGGING ui A A adios 132 4 1 2 5 Port MIFTOFINO coro dde 133 AMZ 6 Cable Test tits tl tl vale ras 134 4 1227 Save COMUN dde ai 135 4128 JUMBO AM it bardas 136 4 12 9 Finmware Upgrade ninge a a aia a ea a sepa A eaaa caesar ede ee 136 A121 OVREDOOL E AE ATA ETE 138 4 12 11 Factory Defaults nn kaanane a Ge es 138 4 12 12 Server LogSinanii nani en n ede a E A a r a thes Ges EEE ag Ea e a ees eee 138 4 1213 Memory LOGS siiis onnie dol Apena Rin ienaat 140 C E ea ee e EEE E EA She ETE EA A E E EEA EE 141 5 COMMAND STRUCTURE kenere a teii eiieeii E e e Ei E a aet E a iea aaien igi oa eiai 142 5 1 Connect t PCS RS 232 serial portra neee a ea e A E AE R n E EA aa AA RAEES E AEAEE 142 52 USM NECE ta a a a das 143 BZ GLI Comimand MOdeS Adi 143 5 2 2 Starting the Cll A aie ae eed ane 145 5 2 3 Editing Features intuir o dan 146 5 3 AAA COMMANS visi n o atte 149 5 3 1 a9a authenticati n IOC csi ii t AA Ea teeta 149 3 2 aaa authentication enable a i eben dad ia dabee dey dduegeeeadue a adni 150 5 3 3 ODIN AUSENCIA aaa 151 5 34 enable authentications cota aa did 152 EDIPO AUN CLON anat 153 5 3 6 ip Ops
61. a port use the no form of this command Syntax gvrp registration forbid no gvrp registration forbid Default Configuration Dynamic registering and deregistering for each VLAN on the port is allowed Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how default dynamic registering and deregistering is forbidden for each VLAN on port e8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if gvrp registration forbid 5 8 7 clear gvrp statistics The clear gvrp statistics privileged EXEC command clears all the GVRP statistics information Syntax clear gvrp statistics ethernet interface port channel port channel number interface A valid Ethernet interface port channel number A valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example clears all the GVRP statistics information on port e8 Console clear gvrp statistics ethernet e8 5 8 8 show gvrp configuration The show gvrp configuration User EXEC command displays GVRP configuration information including timer values whether GVRP and dynamic VLAN creation is enabled and whi
62. address Displays the order in which the TACACS servers are used The default is 0 By which displays the device source IP address used for the TACACS session between the device and the TACACS server This defines the authentication and encryption key for TACACS server The key must match the encryption key used on the TACACS server Displays the port number through which the TACACS session occurs This displays the amount of time that passes before the connection between the device and the TACACS server times out The field range is 1 30 seconds Displays the connection status between the device and the TACACS server The possible field values are e Connected there is currently a connection between the device and the TACACS server e Not Connected there is not currently a connection between the device and the TACACS server Maintains a single open connection between the device and the TACACS server when selected the Add to List button to add the TACACS configuration to the TACACS table at the bottom of the screen 72 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 7 4 802 1x settings Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available
63. address format oob ip address Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example specifies the source IP address Console config tacacs server source ip 172 16 8 1 5 25 5 show tacacs User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The show tacacs command in Privileged EXEC mode displays configuration and statistics fora TACACS server Syntax show tacacs p address jjp address Name or IP address of the host Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays configuration and statistic for a TACACS server Console show tacacs IP address Status Source IP Priority AAA Connected Global 1 Global values TimeOut 3 Source IP 172 16 8 1 OOB Source IP 176 16 8 1 OOB TACACS servers IP address Status Source IP Priority Port Single Connection 49 No Port Single Connection TimeOut Global TimeOut User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 ZO Connected 49 No Global 1 Global values TimeOut 3 Source IP 172 16 8 1 OOB Source IP 176 16 8 1 Global 5 26 User Interface Commands 5 26 1 enable The enable user EXEC command enters the privileged EXEC mode Syntax enable privilege level pr
64. aeons eta vies Haein ed a ein eel shies 240 5451 Interface port channel aic sess 00 pce tassel ances e niyo ii 240 5 15 2 interface range pOrt Chaninel icono ladra 241 ADICON tt ti 241 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 15 4 show interfaces port channel 2 2 sscccceceesseescueedseeeesducedenectcacdescheedduveteesecudneeduneebegddecsedeodaesbdgevendededeneebeedsecsseee 242 5 16 Port Monitor Commands oneei lee ude Leeann cdgeneGuedessboka cards 243 51621 port MONO cs 243 5 16 22 SHOW Ports MONMMMON O dines sanecesapuaccesasaatcedeadetassasceraevaachissagteenaree 244 517 Qos Commands caida ea i a ey A nee At a 246 SATA GOS ss case cby A A A eae se Ro ee ea end Abe O one 246 DPD SNOW QOS cir dades 246 DATS WIT QUGUG COSMA Piezen eia A ie 247 DATA wrr queue Dad Wide 248 5 17 5 priority queue Oout NUM OF QUEUECS 0 0 eee cece ceenne erence ee teeaaeeeeesaaeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeesnaeeeeeeaaeeeseneaeeesneeeeeeaas 249 DATO SNOW QOS INEM ACC ici iii 249 5 172 QOS Map ISC QUO is 252 5177 8 qos trust Global iia ean wi ali a eee ae 253 531 7 9 qos trust Interface uan dd 254 MPA OS COS ir tdt opa 254 11 08 COS OVEMIdS ta nt ra aaa O ln a eN er 255 5 17 12 SNOW GOS MA A A S E 256 5 18 Radius CoM MAA dS ii bada 257 5 181 radi s server NoStu ningi a a ii ds 257 PAE SO A nseeeatedgeis ba tddeperuesdncssascdsnatusededasineesducundassacdensbuaecadssaetgensseee 259 18 3 radius server retransmit scccel eee ie
65. any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States E Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below 28 i Sartrea gt S 802 1X ie switch RADIUS Workstations ie E clients v 7 y e aT i ae e gt do YA a r e Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification e Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial lIn User Service RADI
66. channels to configure Separate non consecutive port channels with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designates a range of port channels all All the channel ports Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Commands under the interface range context are executed independently on each interface in the range If the command returns an error on one of the interfaces it stops the execution of the command on subsequent interfaces Example The following example shows how port channels 1 2 and 8 are grouped to receive the same command Console config interface range port channel 1 2 Console config if 5 15 3 channel group The channel group interface configuration command associates a port with a port channel To remove a port from a port channel use the no form of this command Syntax channel group port channel number mode on auto User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 no channel group port channel_number Specifies the number of the valid port channel for the current port to join on Forces the port to join a channel auto Allows the port to join a channel as a result of an LACP operation Default Configuration The port is not assigned to any port channel Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines Turning off auto negotiation on an aggregate link may
67. command mode VLAN Database Contains commands to create a VLAN as a whole The Global Configuration mode command vlan database is used to enter the VLAN Database Interface Configuration mode Management Access List Contains commands to define management access lists The Global Configuration mode command management access list is used to enter the Management Access List Configuration mode Ethernet Contains commands to manage port configuration The Global Configuration mode command interface ethernet enters the Interface Configuration mode to configure an Ethernet type interface Port Channel Contains commands to configure port channels for example assigning ports to a VLAN or port channel Most of these commands are the same as the commands in the Ethernet interface mode and are used to manage the member ports as a single entity The Global Configuration mode command interface port channel is used to enter the port channel Interface Configuration mode SSH Public Key chain Contains commands to manually specify other device SSH public keys The Global Configuration mode command crypto key pubkey chain ssh is used to enter the SSH Public Key chain Configuration mode MAC Access List Configures conditions required to allow traffic based on MAC addresses The Global Configuration mode command mac access list is used to enter the MAC access list configuration mode Interface Contains commands that configu
68. config line cnsole console config line enable authentication default 15 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 3 5 ip http authentication The ip http authentication global configuration mode command specifies authentication methods for http To return to the default use the no form of this command Syntax ip http authentication method method2 no ip http authentication method method2 Specify at least one from the following table Keyword Source or destination local Uses the local username database for authentication none Uses no authentication radius Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication tacacs Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication Default Configuration The local user database is checked This has the same effect as the command ip http authentication local Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error not if it fails To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error specify none as the final method in the command line Example The following example configures the http authentication console config ip http authentication radius local User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 3 6 ip https authentication The ip https authentication global configuration c
69. configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Flow Admin Back Mdix Port Type Speed Neg control State Pressure Mode 100M Copper Enabled Disabled Auto 100M Copper Enabled Disabled Auto 100M Copper Enabled Disabled Auto 100M Copper Enabled Disabled Auto 100M Copper Enabled Disabled Auto 100M Copper Enabled Disabled Auto 100M Copper Enabled Disabled Auto 100M Copper Enabled Disabled Auto 1G Combo C Full Enabled Disabled Auto 1G Combo C Full Enabled Disabled Auto Flow Admin Speed Neg control State Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled The displayed port configuration information includes the following Port The port number Port Type The port designated IEEE shorthand identifier For example 1000Base T refers to 1000 Mbps baseband signaling inluding both Tx and Rx transmissions Duplex Displays the port Duplex status Speed Refers to the port speed Neg Describes the Auto negotiation status Flow Control Displays the Flow Control status Back Pressure Displays the Back Pressure status MDIX Mode Displays the Auto crossover status Admin State Displays whether the port is enabled or disabled 5 7 15 show interfaces status The show interfaces status user EXEC command displays the status for all configured interfaces Syntax show interfaces status ethernet interface port channel port channel number out of band eth oob interface Interfa
70. configuration command enables Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP snooping To disable IGMP snooping use the no form of this command Syntax ip igmp snooping no ip igmp snooping Default Configuration IGMP snooping is disabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config ip igmp snooping 5 9 2 ip igmp snooping Interface The ip igmp snooping interface configuration command enables Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP snooping on a specific VLAN To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN interface use the no form of this command Syntax ip igmp snooping no ip igmp snooping Default Configuration IGMP snooping is disabled on all VLANs in the set context User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode Interface configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines IGMP snooping can only be enabled on static VLANs Example The following example enables IGMP snooping on VLAN 2 Console config interface vlan 2 Console config if ip igmp snooping 5 9 3 ip igmp snooping mrouter The ip igmp snooping mrouter interface configuration command enables automatic learning of multicast router ports in the context of a specific VLAN To remove automatic learning of multicast router ports use the no form of this command Syntax ip igmp snoopin
71. configuration command sets the time for the retransmission of an Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP request frame to the client Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x timeout supp timeout seconds no dot1x timeout supp timeout seconds Time in seconds that the switch should wait for a response to an EAP request frame from the client before resending the request Range 1 65535 seconds Default Configuration 30 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines The default value of this command should be changed only to adjust to unusual circumstances such as unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers Examples The following example sets the time for the retransmission of an EAP request frame to the client to 3600 seconds Console config dot1x timeout server timeout 3600 5 29 11 dot1x timeout server timeout The dot1x timeout server timeout interface configuration command sets the time for the retransmission of packets to the authentication server Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x timeout server timeout seconds no dot1x timeout server timeout seconds Time in seconds that the switch should wait for a response from the authentication server before resending the request Range 1
72. file from a Server to Flash Memory Use the copy source url image command to copy an image file from a server to Flash memory Copying boot file from a Server to Flash Memory Use the copy source url boot command to copy a boot file from a server to Flash memory Copying a Configuration File from a Server to the Running Configuration Use the copy source url running config command to load a configuration file from a network server to the device running configuration The configuration is added to the running configuration as if the commands were typed in the command line interface CLI The resulting configuration file is a combination of the previous running configuration and the loaded configuration file with the loaded configuration file having precedence Copying a Configuration File from a Server to the Startup Configuration Use the copy source url startup config command to copy a configuration file from a network server to the device startup configuration These commands replace the startup configuration file with the copied configuration file Storing the Running or Startup Configuration on a Server Use the copy running config destination url command to copy the current configuration file to a network server using TFTP Use the copy startup config destination url command to copy the startup configuration file to a network server The configuration file copy can serve as a backup copy Saving the Running Conf
73. form of this command Syntax logging console eve no logging console level Limits the logging of messages displayed on the console to a specified level emergencies alerts critical errors warnings notifications informational debugging Default Configuration The default is informational Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example limits messages logged to the console based on severity level errors Console config logging console errors User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 24 4 logging buffered The logging buffered global configuration command limits syslog messages displayed from an internal buffer based on severity To cancel the buffer use use the no form of this command Syntax logging buffered level no logging buffered level Limits the message logging to a specified level buffer emergencies alerts critical errors warnings notifications informational debugging Default Configuration The default level is informational Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines All the syslog messages are logged to the internal buffer This command limits the commands displayed to the user Example The following example limits syslog messages displayed from an internal buffer based on the severity level debugging Console config logging buffered
74. how to build a IP Based ACL and apply to specify interface m Sample Case Deny IP packets to specific Class C network gt Purpose Verify a positive and negative matches to network IP address with a Class C 24 bit mask no matter the rule defined as permit or deny 1 Any packets pass through the switch will be dropped if the Destination IP Addresses match specific Class C 2 Any packets pass through the switch will be forwarded if the Destination IP Addresses not match specific Class C gt Case Design Class C 172 16 0 0 255 255 255 0 Interface g1 gt Device Connection and Configuration S itero ACL Switch A gt ve vv amer Ethernet Switch mi 393 Segment 1 Segment 2 192 168 0 x 24 172 16 0 x 24 60 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 172 16 0 0 Any 3 Any Any 255 255 255 0 The procedure as following m Create Deny ACL and add to list 1 DENY Rule Choose New ACL Name then key in Deny IP Destination A Choose Action Deny The ACL Name can de entered with other policy name 2 DENY Rule Keep the Source IP Address and Wild Card Mask be blanked 3 DENY Rule Enter 172 16 0 0 in the Destination IP Address and 0 0 0 255 in the Wild Card Mask 4 After click Add to List button the entry would be show at the table O AcL Name Select an ACL New ACL Name Deny IP D
75. is in effect If unspecified default to the timezone acronym Range Up to 4 characters Default Configuration Summer time is disabled offset offset default is 60 zone acronym lf unspecified default to the timezone acronym Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines In both the date and recurring forms of the command the first part of the command specifies when summer time begins and the second part specifies when it ends All times are relative to the local time zone The start time is relative to standard time The end time is relative to summer time If the starting month is chronologically after the ending month the system assumes that you are in the southern hemisphere USA rule for daylight saving time Start First Sunday in April End Last Sunday in October Time 2 am local time EU rule for daylight saving time Start Last Sunday in March End Last Sunday in October Time 1 00 am 01 00 Greenwich Mean Time GMT Examples The following example sets summer time starting on the first Sunday in April at 2am and finishing on the last Sunday in October at 2 am Console config clock summer time recurring first sun apr 2 00 last sun oct 2 00 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 5 5 sntp authentication key The sntp authentication key global configuration command defines an authentication key for Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP To remove the authentication key
76. listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state a n Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Notice Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 255 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 65535 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP Asimple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in Figure 5 7 In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings an
77. mask mask Specifies the network mask of the source IP address Range Valid subnet mask mask prefix length Specifies the number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix The prefix length must be preceded by a forward slash service service Indicates service type Can be one of the following telnet ssh http https or snmp Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Management Access list Configuration mode User Guidelines Rules with Ethernet VLAN and port channel parameters are valid only if an IP address is defined on the appropriate interface The system supports up to 256 management access rules Example The following example shows how all ports are denied in the access list called mlist Console config management access list mlist Console config macl deny 5 13 4 management access class The management access class global configuration command defines which management access list is used To disable restriction use the no form of this command Syntax management access class console only name no management access class name Name of the access list If unspecified defaults to an empty access list Range Valid name console only The device can be managed only from the console Default Configuration This command has no default configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode
78. method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the Switch are public 3 4 Protocols The Switch supports the following protocols Virtual terminal protocols such as Telnet Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 3 4 1 Virtual Terminal Protocols A virtual terminal protocol is a software program such as Telnet that allows you to establish a management session from a Macintosh a PC or a UNIX workstation Because Telnet runs over TCP IP you must have at least one IP address configured on the switch before you can establish access to it with a virtual terminal protocol Terminal emulation differs from a virtual terminal protocol in that you must connect a terminal directly A Notice to the console serial port 3 4 2 SNMP Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is the standard management protocol for multi vendor IP networks SNMP supports transaction based queries that allow the protocol to format messages and to transmit information between reporting devices and data collection programs SNMP
79. mode and from Global Configuration mode to Privileged EXEC mode Global Configuration Mode Global configuration commands apply to features that affect the system as a whole rather than just a specific interface The Privileged EXEC mode command configure is used to enter the Global Configuration mode The Global Configuration mode commands perform the following At the Privileged EXEC mode prompt enter the command configure and press lt Enter gt The Global Configuration mode prompt is displayed The Global Configuration mode prompt consists of the device host name followed by the word config and console To return from Global Configuration mode to Privileged EXEC mode the user can use one of the following commands exit end Ctri Z The following example illustrates how to access Global Configuration mode and teturn back to the Privileged EXEC mode console console configure console config exit console Interface Configuration Mode and Specific Configuration Modes Interface Configuration commands are to modify specific interface operations The following are the Interface Configuration modes 14 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Line Interface Contains commands to configure the management connections These include commands such as line speed timeout settings etc The Global Configuration mode command line is used to enter the line configuration
80. on severity To cancel the buffer use the no form of this command 23 7 1 Syntax User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 logging file eve no logging file level Limits the logging of messages to the buffer to a specified level emergencies alerts critical errors warnings notifications informational and debugging Default Configuration The default severity level is errors Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example limits syslog messages sent to the logging file based on the severity level alerts Console config logging file alerts 5 24 8 clear logging file The clear logging file privileged EXEC command clears messages from the logging file Syntax clear logging file Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example clears messages from the logging file Console clear logging file Clear Logging File y n y User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 24 9 show logging The show logging privileged EXEC command displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the internal buffer Syntax show logging Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privilege
81. operation of Ethernet e5 to force 100 Mbps operation Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if speed 100 5 7 6 duplex The duplex interface configuration command configures the full half duplex operation of a given Ethernet interface when not using auto negotiation To restore the default use the no form of this command Syntax duplex half full no duplex half Force half duplex operation full Force full duplex operation Default Configuration The interface is set to full duplex Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet out of band Ethernet mode User Guidelines Before attempting to force a particular duplex mode on the port operating at 10 100 Mbps disable the auto negotiation on that port Half duplex mode can be set only for ports operating at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps Example The following example configures the duplex operation of Ethernet e5 to force full duplex operation Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if duplex full 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 7 7 negotiation The negotiation interface configuration command enables auto negotiation operation for the speed and duplex parameters of a given interface To disable negotiation use the no form of this command Syntax negotiation no negotiation Default Configuration auto negotiation Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet po
82. port contribution to the root path cost The path cost is adjusted to a higher or lower value and is used to forward traffic when a path being rerouted Value Rage 1 20000000 Default Path Cost The default path cost of the port is automatically set by the port speed and the default path cost method The default values for path costs are Ethernet 2000000 Fast Ethernet 200000 Gigabit Ethernet 20000 When selected the default path cost is implemented Indicates priority value of the port The priority value influences the port choice when a bridge has two ports connected in a loop The priority value is between 0 240 The priority value is provided in increments of 16 Indicates the bridge priority and the MAC Address of the designated bridge Indicates the selected port s priority and interface Where indicates the cost of the port participating in the STP topology Ports with a lower cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops This indicates the number of times the port has changed from the Blocking state to Forwarding state 10 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 m STP Port status table VLAN 5 Spanning Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Tree Multicast SNMP Admin STP Port Settings lt lt Previous 1 2 Next gt gt Designated Designated A Port Port Port Path ean A Designated Forward Port SUP rast State Role o me r Cost Transitions 518 Enabled
83. priority is mapped Four traffic priority queues are supported The Restore Defaults button restores the device factory defaults for mapping CoS values to a forwarding queue 83 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 CoS Default The Table contains the following fields Interface Interface to which the CoS configuration applies Default CoS Determines the default CoS value for incoming packets for which a VLAN tag is not defined The possible field values are 0 7 The default CoS is 0 Restore Defaults Restores the device factory defaults for mapping CoS values to forwarding queue LAG LAG to which the CoS configuration applies 4 8 2 Queue Setting The Queue Setting screen see figure 4 38 contains fields for defining the QoS queue forwarding types Scheduling Queue Strict WRR WRR Weight Priority of WRR Bandwidth o Blo nie O 310 gt JC Cancel Config Figure 4 38 Queue Setting screen The page contains the following fields Strict Priority This indicates that traffic scheduling for the selected queue is based strictly on the queue priority WRR This indicates that traffic scheduling for the selected queue is based strictly on the WRR Queue Shows the queue for which the queue settings are displayed The possible field range is 1 4 WRR Weight This displays the WRR weights to queues Default Rate 1 2 4 8 84 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 of WRR Band
84. protocol To remove the specified community string use the no form of this command Syntax snmp server community community ro rw su p address snmp server community group community group name ip address no snmp server community string ip address community Character string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Range 1 20 characters ro Specifies read only access rw Specifies read write access su Specifies SNMP administrator access p address Management station IP address Default is all IP addresses An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines group name Name of a previously defined group The group defines the objects available to the community Range 1 30 characters The View name command cannot be specified for su which has access to the whole MIB However the View name command can be used to restrict the access rights of a community string Specifying a view name parameter does the following Generates an internal security name Maps the internal security name for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 security models to an internal group name Maps the internal group name for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 security models to view name read view and notify view always and for rw for write view also The group name command can be used to restrict the access rights of a community string Specifying a group name parameter do
85. protocols has been configured packets from each network layer protocol can be sent over the link The link remains configured for communications until explicit LCP or NCP packets close the link or until some external event occurs This is the actual switch port link type It may differ from the administrative state 4 9 5 MSTP Properties MSTP provides differing load balancing scenarios For example while port A is blocked in one STP instance the same port is placed in the Forwarding State in another STP instance The MSTP Properties screen see figure 4 52 contains information for defining global MSTP settings region names MSTP revisions and maximum hops MSTP Properties Region Name 00 03 6d 30 57 00 Revision D Max Hops 20 IST Master 32768 00 03 6d 30 57 00 Figure 4 52 MSTP Properties User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The page contains the following fields Region Name Where provides a user defined STP region name Revision Where defines unsigned 16 bit number that identifies the revision of the current MST configuration The revision number is required as part of the MST configuration The possible field range 0 65535 Max Hops Which indicates the total number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded Once the BPDU is discarded the port information is aged out The possible field range is 1 40 The field default is 20 hops IST Master Where identifies the Spanni
86. queue out interface configuration command wrr queue cos map It is recommended to specifically map a single VPT to a queue rather than mapping multiple VPTs to a single queue Example The following example maps CoS 3 to queue 7 Console config wrr queue cos map 7 3 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 17 4 wrr queue bandwidth The wrr queue bandwidth interface configuration command assigns Weighted Round Robin WRR weights to egress queues The weights ratio determines the frequency in which the packet scheduler dequeues packets from each queue To return to the default values use the no form of this command Syntax wrr queue bandwidth weight weight2 weight_n no wrr queue bandwidth weight1 weight_n Sets the bandwidth ratio in which the WRR packet scheduler dequeues packets Separate each value by spaces Range 6 255 Default Configuration The default WRR weight is 1 8 ratio for all queues each weight set to 6 Command Mode Interface Configuration mode User Guidelines The packet refers to a threshold by the conformance level Weighted round robin queues should be defined on the interface Use the priority queue out num of queues command to globally configure a queue as WRR or Strict Priority Use this command to set a weight per interface The ratio will be like this The ratio for each queue is defined by the queue weight divided by the sum of all queue weights i e the nor
87. reset the default maximum age use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 Default Configuration The default max age for IEEE STP is 20 seconds Command Modes Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age to 10 seconds User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console config spanning tree max age 10 5 21 6 spanning tree priority The spanning tree priority global configuration command configures the spanning tree priority The priority value is used to determine which bridge is elected as the root bridge To reset the default spanning tree priority use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree priority priority no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Default Configuration The default bridge priority for IEEE STP is 32768 Command Modes Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The lower the priority the more likely the bridge is to be the Root Bridge Example The following example configures spanning tree priority to 12288 Console config spanning tree priority 12288 5 21 7 spanning tree disable The spanning tree disable interface configuration command disables spanning tree on a sp
88. runs on top of the User Datagram Protocol UDP offering a connectionless mode service 3 4 3 Management Architecture All of the management application modules use the same Messaging Application Programming Interface MAPI By unifying management methods with a single MAPI configuration parameters set using one method console port for example are immediately displayable by the other management methods for example SNMP agent of Web browser The management architecture of the Switch adheres to the IEEE open standard This compliance assures customers that the Switch is compatible with and will interoperate with other solutions that adhere to the same open standard 26 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 Web Configuration The WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 can be configured through an Ethernet connection make sure the manager PC must be set on same the IP subnet address with the switch For example if you have changed the default IP address of the Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 1 and 253 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Or you can use the factory default IP address 192 168 1 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC The sceen in Figure 4 1 appears PLANET Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE or Netscape Browser RJ 45 UTP Cabl Figure 4 1 Web Management via Ethernet m Logging on the sw
89. server set sysName sysname abc The following example sets the entry MIB rndCommunityTable with keys 0 0 0 0 and public The field rndCommunityAccess gets the value super and the rest of the fields get their default values Console config snmp server set rndCommunityTable rndCommunityMngStationAddr 0 0 0 0 rndCommunityString public rndCommunityAccess super 5 20 8 show snmp The show snmp privileged EXEC command displays the SNMP status Syntax show snmp Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the SNMP communications status Console show snmp User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Community String Community Access public read only private read write private read write OOB management stations Community String Community Access private read write Traps are enabled Authentication trap is enabled Trap Rec Address 192 122 173 42 Trap Rec Community public OOB trap receivers Trap Rec Address 176 16 8 9 Trap Rec Community public System Contact Robert System Location Marketing IP address All 172 16 1 1 172 17 1 1 IP address 176 16 8 9 Version 2 Version 2 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 21 Spanning Tree Commands 5 21 1 spanning tree The
90. spanning tree port priority The spanning tree port priority interface configuration command configures port priority To reset the default port priority use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree port priority priority no spamning tree port priority priority The port priority Range 0 240 in multiples of 16 Default Configuration The default port priority for IEEE STP is 128 Command Modes Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the spanning priority on e5 to 96 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 96 5 21 10 spanning tree portfast The spanning tree portfast interface configuration command enables PortFast mode In PortFast mode the interface is immediately put into the forwarding state upon linkup without waiting for the timer to expire To disable PortFast mode use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree portfast no spanning tree portfast User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration PortFast mode is disabled Command Modes Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines This feature should be used only with interfaces connected to end stations Otherwise an accidental topology loop could cause a data packet loop and disrupt switch an
91. that the switch sends an Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP request identity frame assuming that no response is received to the client before restarting the authentication process How long the user is logged in Last Authentication Time since last authentication Mac address The supplicant MAC address 5 29 13 show dot1x users User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The show dot1x users privileged EXEC command displays 802 1X users for the switch Syntax show dot1x users username username username Supplicant username Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays 802 1X users console show dot1x users Username Session Time Last Auth Auth Method Interface Bob 1d3h 58m 0008 3b79 8787 1 1 John 8h19m 2m 0008 3b89 3127 1 2 MAC Address Remote None The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Field Description Username The User Name representing the identity of the Supplicant Login Time How long the user is logged in Last Authentication Time since last authentication Authentication Method The authentication method used to establish the session Mac address The supplicant MAC address Interface The interface that the user is using 5 29 1
92. this event Can have the following values none log trap log trap In the case of log an entry is made in the log table for each event In the case of trap an SNMP trap is sent to one or more management stations community text If an SNMP trap is to be sent it is sent to the SNMP community specified by this octet string Range 0 127 characters description text A comment describing this event Range 0 127 characters owner name Enter a name that specifies who configured this event If unspecified the name is an empty string Range 0 127 characters Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures an event with the trap index of 10 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console config rmon event 10 log 5 19 9 show rmon events The show rmon events user EXEC command displays the RMON event table Syntax show rmon events Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the RMON event table Console show rmon events Index Description Type Community Owner 1 Errors Log CLI 2 High Broadcast Log Trap router Manager Jan 18 2002 23 58 17 Jan 18 2002
93. timeout timeout no radius server timeout User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 timeout Specifies the timeout value in seconds Range 1 30 Default Configuration The default value is 3 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example sets the interval for which a router waits for a server host to reply to 5 seconds Console config radius server timeout 5 5 18 6 radius server deadtime The radius server deadtime global configuration command improves RADIUS response times when servers are unavailable The command is used to cause the unavailable servers to be skipped To reset the default value use the no form of this command Syntax radius server deadtime deadtime no radius server deadtime deadtime Length of time in minutes for which a RADIUS server is skipped over by transaction requests Range 0 2000 Default Configuration The default dead time is 0 minutes Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example sets a dead time where a RADIUS server is skipped over by transaction requests for this period to 10 minutes User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console config radius server deadtime 10 5 18 7 show radius servers The show radius servers user EXEC co
94. user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED 6 2147483618 01 Jan 2000 05 13 50 Informational LINK I Up e6 7 2147483619 01 Jan 2000 05 12 15 Warning oLINK W Down e6 ofAA I CONNECT New http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED ofAA 1 DISCONNECT http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 51 destinatio n 192 168 1 254 TERMINATED HAAA I CONNECT New http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED ofA8 1 DISCONNECT http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinatio n 192 168 1 254 TERMINATED WAAA I CONNECT New http connection For user admin source 192 168 1 51 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED 2 2147483614 01 Jan 2000 08 49 35 Informational 3 2147483615 01 Jan 2000 07 56 16 Informational 4 2147483616 01 Jan 2000 07 56 10 Informational 5 2147483617 01 Jan 2000 07 40 23 Informational 8 2147483620 01 Jan 2000 05 00 47 Informational 9 2147483621 01 Jan 2000 04 21 11 Informational v Cancel Config Figure 4 84 Memory Logs screen User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The page contains the following fields Log Index The log number in the Log File Table Log Time Specifies the time at which the log was entered in the Log File Table Severity Specifies the log severity Description The log message text 4 12 14 Flash Logs The Flash Log screen see figure 4 85 contains informa
95. users use the dot1x auth not req interface VLAN command Examples The following example enables unauthorized users access to the VLAN console config if Config VLAN dot1x auth not req 5 29 16 dot1x multiple hosts The dot1x multiple hosts interface configuration command allows multiple hosts clients on an 802 1X authorized port that has the dot1x port control interface configuration command set to auto Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting dot1x multiple hosts no dot1x multiple hosts This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Multiple hosts are disabled If a port would join a port channel the state would be multiple hosts as long as the port is member in the port channel Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines This command enables the attachment of multiple clients to a single 802 1X enabled port In this mode only one of the attached hosts must be successfully authorized for all hosts to be granted network access If the port becomes unauthorized all attached clients are denied access to the network If a port would join a port channel the state would be multiple host as long as the port is member in the port channel Examples The following command allows multiple hosts clients on an 802 1X authorized port console config if Config VLAN dot1x multiple hosts User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48
96. with RJ 45 tips For more information please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A Step5 Supply power to the Switch A Connect one end of the power cable to the Switch B Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet When the Switch receives power the Power LED should remain solid Green 20 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 2 2 2 Rack Mounting To install the Switch in a 19 inch standard rack please follows the instructions described below Step1 Place the Switch on a hard flat surface with the front panel positioned towards the front side Step2 Attach the rack mount bracket to each side of the Switch with supplied screws attached to the package Figure 2 5 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Switch Figure 2 5 Attach brackets to the Switch Caution You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty Step3 Secure the brackets tightly Step4 Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side Step5 After the brackets are attached to the Switch use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 2 6 dem TE pr br Figure 2 6 Mounting the Switch in a Rack 21 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Step6 Proceeds with the steps 4 and steps 5 of session 2 2 1 Desktop Installation to connect the ne
97. 0 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration The default storm control broadcast rate is 12000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet User Guidelines Use the port storm control broadcast enable interface configuration command to enable broadcast storm control The rate is rounded to the nearest 64 kbytes sec except 1 63 kbytes sec which is rounded to 64 bytes sec Note that if the rate is 0 broadcast packets are not forwarded Example The following example configures the maximum broadcast rate 100 kilobytes per second console config interface ethernet g2 console config if port storm control broadcast rate 100 5 7 21 show ports storm control The show ports storm control privileged EXEC command displays the storm control configuration Syntax show ports storm control ethernet interface ethernet interface A valid Ethernet port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Modes Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the storm control configuration Console show ports storm control Port Broadcast Storm control kbyes sec User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 el 8000 e2 Disabled e3 Disabled 5 8 GVRP Commands 5 8 1 gvrp enable global GVRP or GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is an indust
98. 0 100Mbps 10 100Base TX RJ 45 Connector pin assignment Contact 3 4 5 6 7 8 MDI Media Dependant Interface Tx transmit Tx transmit Rx receive Not used Rx receive Not used 1000Mbps 1000Base T RJ 45 Connector pin assignment Contact 1 OO NID oO BR Ww Dd MDI BI_DA BI_DA BI_DB BI_DC BI_DC BI_DB BI_DD BI_DD MDI X BI_DB BI_DB BI_DA BI_DD BI_DD BI_DA BI_DC BI_DC MDI X Media Dependant Interface Cross Rx receive Rx receive Tx transmit Tx transmit Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 RJ 45 cable pin assignment The standard cable RJ 45 pin assignment User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The standard RJ 45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4SIDE1 SIDE 2 Straight Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4SIDE1 SIDE 2 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE2 1
99. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3 30 Sil 2 933534355936 UU UN E 4 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 De 50 Oil OO OM O4 nO TI CI MEO SO Y 6 60 61 62 63 The following example displays the DSCP dscp mutation map Dscp dscp mutation map d1 d2 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 0 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Qe 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 BF 30 SIS S A ES CES CES TES O MNES Y 4 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 5 50 Sl 62 Ge wl Ge e y a fy 6 60 61 62 63 5 18 Radius Commands 5 18 1 radius server host The radius server host global configuration command specifies a RADIUS server host To delete the specified RADIUS host use the no form of this command Syntax radius server host jo address auth port auth port number timeout timeout retransmit retransmit deadtime deadtime User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 key key source source priority priority no radius server host p address ip address IP address of the RADIUS server host An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines timeout Specifies the timeout value in seconds If no timeout value is specified the global value is used Range 1 30 retransmit Specifies the re transmit value If no re transmit value is specified the global value is used Range 1 10 deadtime Length of time in minutes for which
100. 00 after reset Event Description Time User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 1 Errors Jan 18 2002 23 48 19 1 Errors Jan 18 2002 23 58 17 2 High Broadcast Jan 18 2002 23 59 48 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description Event An index that uniquely identifies the event Description Acomment describing this event Time The time this entry created 5 19 11 rmon table size The rmon table size global configuration command configures the maximum RMON tables sizes To return to the default configuration use the no form of this command Syntax rmon table size history entries log entries no rmon table size history log history entries Maximum number of history table entries Range 20 32767 log entries Maximum number of log table entries Range 20 32767 Default Configuration History table size is 270 Log table size is 100 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The configured table size is effective after the device is rebooted Example The following example configures the maximum RMON history table sizes to 1000 entries Console config rmon table size history 1000 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 20 SNMP Commands 5 20 1 snmp server community The snmp server community global configuration command sets up the community access string to permit access to the SNMP
101. 020 WGSW 48040 LACP System Priority Indicates the global LACP priority value The possible range is 1 65535 and the default value is 1 Port Set the port number which need to timeout and the priority values are assigned LACP Port Priority Where set the LACP priority value for the port and the field range is 1 65535 LACP Timeout Administrative LACP timeout A short or long timeout value can be selected Long is the default Admin Key A channel will only be formed between ports having the same admin key in other words this only applies to ports located on the same switch 4 4 VLAN Configuration A Virtual LAN VLAN is a logical network grouping that limits the broadcast domain It allows you to isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members Basically creating a VLAN from a switch is logically equivalent of reconnecting a group of network devices to another Layer 2 switch However all the network devices are still plug into the same switch physically The Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q tagged based and GVRP Dynamic VLAN setting in web management page In the default configuration VLAN support is 802 1Q IEEE 802 1Q VLANs IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of br
102. 040 5 29 17 dot1x single host violation The dot1x single host violation interface configuration command configures the action to be taken when a station whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address attempts to access the interface Use the no form of this command to return to default Syntax dot1x single host violation forward discard discard shutdown trap seconds no port dot1x single host violation forward Forward frames with source addresses not the supplicant address but do not learn the address discard Discard frames with source addresses not the supplicant address discard shutdown Discard frames with source addresses not the supplicant address The port is also shutdown trap seconds Send SNMP traps and specifies the minimum time between consecutive traps Range 1 1000000 Default Configuration Discard frames with source addresses not the supplicant address No traps Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines The command is relevant when Multiple hosts is disabled and the user has been successfully authenticated Examples The following example uses the forward action to forward frames with source addresses console config if Config VLAN dot1x single host violation forward trap 100 5 29 18 show dot1x advanced The show dot1x advanced privileged EXEC command displays 802 1X advanced features for the switch or for the specified in
103. 08 dynamic e9 11 Forbidden ports for multicast addresses Vlan MAC Address Ports 1 0100 5e02 0203 e8 19 0100 5e02 0208 e8 Vlan IP Address Type Ports 1 224 239 130 2 2 3 static e1 g2 19 224 239 130 2 2 8 static e1 8 19 224 239 130 2 2 8 dynamic e9 11 Forbidden ports for multicast addresses Vian IP Address Ports 1 224 239 130 2 2 3 e8 19 224 239 130 2 2 8 e8 5 4 17 show bridge multicast filtering The show bridge multicast filtering privileged EXEC command displays the multicast filtering configuration Syntax show bridge multicast filtering vian id vlan_id A valid VLAN ID value Default Configuration This command has no default configuration 17 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example the multicast configuration for VLAN 1 is displayed console show bridge multicast filtering 1 Filtering Enabled VLAN 1 Forward All Port Static Status e1 Forbidden Filter e2 Forward Forward s e3 Forward d 5 4 18 show ports security The show ports security privileged EXEC command displays the port lock status Syntax show ports security ethernet interface port channel port channel number interface A valid Ethernet port port channel number A valid port channel number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration
104. 1 show crypto key pubkey chain ssh The show crypto key pubkey chain ssh privileged EXEC command displays SSH public keys stored on the device Syntax show crypto key pubkey chain ssh username username fingerprint bubble babble hex User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 username Specifies the remote SSH client username bubble babble Fingerprints in Bubble Babble format hex Fingerprint in Hex format If fingerprint is unspecified it defaults to Hex format Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays all SSH public keys stored on the device Console show crypto key pubkey chain ssh Username Fingerprint bob 9A CC 01 C5 78 39 27 86 79 CC 23 C5 98 59 F 1 86 john 98 F7 6E 28 F2 79 87 C8 18 F8 88 CC F8 89 87 C8 The following example displays the SSH public called bob Console show crypto key pubkey chain ssh username bob Username bob Key 005C300D 06092486 5 23 System Management 5 23 1 ping The ping user EXEC command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping p address hostname size packet_size count packet_counf timeout time_ouf jjp address IP address to ping An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines hostname
105. 10 Select Security ACL Binding in the Menu bar 11 Choose Port g1 at the Interface 12 Choose IP Based ACL select ACL name with Deny Source A that we had been created at step 1 Click Add to List button the entry would be show at the table 62 PLANET Port VLAN Moteros d Commenicaion Setup con fig Config ACL Binding Statistics User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 ACL Security Qos t Tr rE Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Interface Port ot y ACL Name O PP Based ACL Deny IP Destination A O Lac O mac Based ACL Deny MAC A Select ACL 4 6 3 MAC Based ACL Deny IP Destination 4 Delete Add New Save Config Cancel Config The MAC Based ACL screen see figure 4 28 allows a MAC based ACL to be defined ACEs can be added only if the ACL is not bound to an interface et amp Conmmesicaton MAC based ACL O ACL Name Delete ACL Action Source MAC Address Dest MAC Address LAN ID Ether Type Action Source A PLANET Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut New ACL Name Permit v wild card mask q wild Card mask PAN EAT Destination LAN ID Address Figure 4 28 MAC Base ACL screen 63 En Save Config Cancel Config User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The Page contains the following fields ACL Name Displays the user def
106. 2007 Part No EM WGSW24020_484040_v1 0 2081 A34030 001 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 TABLE OF CONTENTS A SINTRODUGTION 0 Al A i bia beh an ge 14 1 1 Packet Contents coi toa 14 LAW to Use TA Ma atea 14 1 3 Product Feature ii ete eee ee ed ita ss 15 1 4 Product Specification lt a ihn ans Side A ee tinh eee nena eet 16 2 INSTALLATION ona 18 2 y Product Description a ti a At 18 2 4 1 Product VI di eins 18 2 1 2 Switch Erotic re 18 21 39 LED dica imita 19 LLAMO Rear Pa Aaa 19 2 2 Install the Switch ii alia Ale ide We ee ae we eae 20 2 2 1 Desktop Installation eiii a reten Seed a a e ole a e 20 2 22 Rack MountiNd eusroranariai dad as o pudre 21 2 23 Installing the SFP Transtee sta e 22 3 CONFIGURATION ii dai 24 3 1 Management Access Ovino 24 S11 Administration Console si sheng iad Geten e aa dis 25 Sil 2 DIRECEACCESS tata 25 3 2 Web Management sii nee a ee i eee ee 25 3 3 SNMP Based Network Management ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeenaeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeeesneeeeeeaeeeseeaeeesnieeeeeenaeeeseeaeeesnneeeenes 26 IA PROTOCOIS sss A ta datar calpe 26 341 Virtual Terminal Protocols ca a 26 34 2 SNMP Protocol ein 26 3 4 3 Management Architecture ssn a debera 26 4 Web CONTQUIAION ruminal 27 LM dd 29 RS RR NN ee ae 30 42 1 SUMMA cit 30 4 2 2 Network SOUINGS orisii ker aia tente 32 AZ IA iz eee oe cit et A E 33 4 3 Port Configuration ii does 36 4 3 1 Port Set gS ET a E e a a RaT E E
107. 205 5 7 20 port storm control broadcast rate eee eeeceee cence tence ee eeneeeeetaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseneeeeesnaeeeeenaeeeseneeeeesneeeeeeaas 205 5 7 2 1 Show ports Stonm COntrol toco il 206 5 8 GVRP Commands dnan i sue ceed e a E i a saveuseuddessteeeuee aaa a a e aia 207 9 91 gyp enable global boda dados 207 5 8 2 gvrp enable interface siise eei eei a i a e eiea ai oiadi 207 ReRe rlan E A E A E S E E TET 208 5 8 4 gvrp vian creation forbid nenandur na ei sien AN E erie aie 209 5 8 5 gvrp registration Torio iio pai anda shee 210 5 8 7 clear gvrp statistic iii aa dia 210 5 8 8 SHOW Vrp COMMGUNATOM ici A A ama 211 5 8 9 show gvrp Statistics dat rai 212 5 8 10 show Qvrp error StatiStics ccoo aaa 213 5 9IGMP SNO0piNg CoMMANdS ui das 214 59 1 PIMP SNOOPING GlODAl ic N A ansia ras 214 9 2 ip igmp snooping Interface iii eiii 214 5 9 3 ipigmp Snooping MMOUTEM iia A A 215 5 9 4 ip IGMPSNOOPING MOSt TIME OUl i ccoo ricino iii 215 5 9 5 ip igmp snooping Mrouter tiMe OUt oococonoccconoccccnononanonononcnnnoncncnnno cnn rro n nn nano rr rro n errar 216 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 9 6 ip igmp Snooping leAaVve tiMe OUt A 217 5 9 7 Show ip iGMp SNOOPING MU ano 217 5 9 8 show ip igmp Snooping interface igisige a dedica 218 5 9 9 show ip IGMP SNOOPING GFOUPS c cccccococcccnononcnononcncnononcn nn nn rre 219 5101P Addressing COMMAND ete 220 5 10 14 ip address niece each hihi Waa einen het ae ata Ae
108. 2147483647 immediate leave Specifies that the port should be immediately removed from the members list after receivingIGMP Leave Default Configuration The default leave time out configuration is 10 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines The leave timeout should be set greater than the maximum time that a host is allowed to respond to an IGMP Query Use immediate leave only where there is only one host connected to a port Example The following example configures the host leave time out to 60 seconds Console config interface vlan 2 Console config if ip igmp snooping leave time out 60 5 9 7 show ip igmp snooping mrouter The show ip igmp snooping mrouter User EXEC command displays information on dynamically learned multicast router interfaces Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter interface vian id vlan_id VLAN ID value Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows IGMP snooping mrouter information User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter 5 9 8 show ip igmp snooping interface The show ip igmp snooping interface User EXEC command displays IGMP snooping configuration Syntax show ip igmp snooping interface vlan id vlan_
109. 23 59 48 Last time sent The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description Index An index that uniquely identifies the event Description A comment describing this event Type The type of notification that the device generates about this event Can have the following User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 values none log trap log trap In the case of log an entry is made in the log table for each event In the case of trap an SNMP trap is sent to one or more management stations Community If an SNMP trap is to be sent it is sent to the SNMP community specified by this octet string Owner The entity that configured this event Last time sent The time this entry last generated an event If this entry has not generated any events this value is zero 5 19 10 show rmon log The show rmon log user EXEC command displays the RMON logging table Syntax show rmon log event event Event index Range 0 65535 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the RMON logging table Console show rmon log Maximum table size 500 Event Description Time 1 Errors Jan 18 2002 23 48 19 1 Errors Jan 18 2002 23 58 17 2 High Broadcast Jan 18 2002 23 59 48 Console show rmon log Maximum table size 500 8
110. 29 8 dot1x timegut tx period ici aoan aaaea EAE aE A EEA AAEN E a EA A E AE EAE EEEE AAE EEA A EE aaa 357 5 29 9 dot x max Teq na a vested e Gene a a a a tes Geen a net aS 358 5 29 10 dot1x timeout supp timeout oe ee cece eee ente ee nono eter non nn rro unuk EAEE r nn rre rra rre errar rn rra EEEn EEEE 358 5 29 11 d t1x timeout Server timeoul iii kanp a E e a E a aaa 359 52912 SHOW dot rc A A A anes ieee 360 5 291 3 SNOW GO X USET S pesisiran pianina nenten liado piden 362 5 29 14 SHOW GOtl x Statistics zee a in 363 12 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 29 15 dott X auth mOt red iaa 364 5 2916 dottx MUItIPIS ROStS ic das 365 5 29 17 dot1x single host vilationy ico iii ii ide 366 5 29 18 SHOW dot1x AdVANCEG EEEE E EAE TTA A TTT 366 TROUBLESHOOTING Senine era eee eh ein ceed ee vie E dia 368 ARPENDEXA raain ondra mack tates A N aiae E N oi 369 A T Switch S RJ 45 Pin ASSIGHIMEMS iio pbeeeusuesdvsectpeeesucbesausantphesbuenesivhosteeseanedeecdheapeesneeetesctnestunenentiese 369 A2 RJ45 Gable PICASSO MENE poeri esiema eki e aaeeea cde gees cence a aai eea a e E a i ee ES 369 A 3 Available Modules innoire E Aaa 371 13 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 1 INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing PLANET WGSW Gigabit Managed Switch WGSW 24020 and WGSW 48040 In the following section the term Switch means the two Switches i e WGSW 24020 and WGSW 48040 term of switch can be any third part swi
111. 3 Notification Recipient Recipients Notification User UDP Filter 1P Type Name Security Level Port Name Timeout Retries ea vv Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 69 Notification Recipient User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 12 Admin The Admin section provides information for devining system parameters including User account and file management device software Under Admin the folling topics are provided to devine and view the system informatin User Authentication Static Address Dynamic Address Logging Port Mirroting Cable Test Storm Control Save Configuration Jumbo Frame Firmware Upgrade Reboot Factory Default Server Logs Memory Logs Flash Logs 4 12 1 User Authentication The User Authentication screen see figure 4 70 is used to modify user passwords CH PLLANET E Setup Port Config WLAN Config Statistics ACL Security Gad Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin Loga User Authentication User Authentication Authentication Type Local v Local User Edit User Name Password Alphanumeric Confirm Password A Local Users Table User Name admin Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 70 User Authentication screen User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The page contains the following fields Authentication Type Defines the user authentication methods Also you can choose combinations of all the authentication methods The possible field values are
112. 4 show dotlx statistics The show dot1x statistics privileged EXEC command displays 802 1X statistics for the specified interface Syntax show dot1x statistics ethernet interface interface The full syntax is unit port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays 802 1X statistics for the specified interface Switch show dot1x statistics ethernet g1 EapolFramesRx 11 EapolFramesTx 12 EapolStartFramesRx 1 EapolLogoffFramesRx 1 EapolRespldFramesRx 3 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 EapolRespFramesRx 6 EapolReqgldFramesTx 3 EapolReqFramesTx 6 InvalidEapolFramesRx 0 LastEapolFrameVersion 1 EapLengthErrorFramesRx 0 LastEapolFrameSource 0008 3b79 8787 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field EapolFramesRx EapolFramesTx EapolStartFramesRx EapolLogoffFramesRx EapolRespldFramesRx EapolRespFramesRx EapolReqldFramesTx EapolReqFramesTx InvalidEapolFramesRx EapLengthErrorFramesRx LastEapolFrameVersion LastEapolFrameSource Description The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator The number of EAPOL
113. 41 5 27 15 switchport forbidden VaN ci sicitiria a eiis 342 5 27 16 map protocol protoColS GrOUP ec eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeseeeeeeesaaeeeseeaaeeeseeeeeesenaeeseenaeeeseneeeeesnneeeeneaas 343 5 27 17 switchport general map protocols group VIAN ee eeceeeeeeeeeeenneeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeseeeaeeesaeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeenaeeeeseaas 344 5 27 18 ipiinternal uSage VlAaN dido denia indi 344 IZ NO SNOW Miranda oia 345 5 27 20 show Vian internal USAGE ci aia 346 5 27 21 show interfaces SWitChport assener dd daa 346 5 28 Web Sewer COMMAND shames 348 5 28 Vip Ap SCTVOl in a dde dio aia 348 5 28 2 O aaatedsd en truscdasnasacdenseusecetsaaeneenagens 348 5 28 3 ip https Server A ie ee ev i e a a 349 5 284 ip https port ini econ A Ai Ai 350 28 5 crypto Certificate Generate criar taras 350 5 28 6 SHOW PSNI g cevesd cee ccze saa eets e daniel Meecha dai 351 5 28 7 SNOW Ip NUS veces cessed Aaa 351 5 29 OZ AA GOMA a dades 352 5 2971 daa authentication dot Xica oi 352 5 29 2 dot1x system auth COntrol cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeceeeeeeseneeeeseaeeeseeeeeeesnaeeeeneaas 353 LICOR POE COMO ii A See eae an ee 353 5 29 4 dot1x re aduthenticatiON cocoa iii iaa id 354 5 29 5 dot1x timeout re aUth PEriOd seirinin ennan enni eataa aia r aaide tapiat anaien erinit tas 355 5 29 0 dot1x re authenticates ic A A A Ea ia 355 5 29 7 dot1x timeout quIStperiod coi iaa a a E E daaa iaai 356 5
114. 48040 4 6 4 MAC Based ACL Configure Sample This chapter will teah you how to configure a MAC based ACL in the Switch m Sample Case Deny IP packets to specific Class C network gt Purpose When the workstation with IP address 192 168 99 188 and MAC address 00 11 08 57 E0 1E ping to PC with IP address 192 168 99 57 and MAC address 00 30 4F 1D 9F DE use MAC based ACL function from ACL to deny or shutdown and permit the traffic transmit ability of notebook that connect to port 8 of Switch gt Case Design Action DENY Match MAC Address Source MAC Address 00 11 08 57 E0 1E Destination MAC Address 00 30 4F 1D 9F DE Applied Interface Interface g2 gt Device Connection and Configuration MAC Address 00 11 08 57 E0 1E T S ACL Switch IF D ES MAC Address 00 30 4F 1D 9F DE Setting procedure from Switch Web interface Create Deny MAC ACL and add to list 1 Please enter into Web interface and choose ACL function Za Then choose MAC based ACL function 3 Please input a new ACL name for example Deny MAC 2 65 oN DN FS User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 To defined Permit Deny or Shutdown from Action item Deny Rule Input Source MAC Address 00 11 08 57 E0 1E with Wild Card Mask 00 00 00 00 00 00 Deny Rule Enter Dest Mac Address 00 30 4F 1D 9F DE with Wild Card Mask 00 00 00 00 00 00 Deny Rule Input the VLAN ID and default VLAN I
115. 6 Mbit Flow Conirol Back pressure for Half Duplex IEEE 802 3x Pause Frame for Full Duplex Jumbo Frame 9K bytes per 10 100 1000Base T Ports Dimension 430 x 350 x 44 5mm W x D x H 1U height Weight 3 4 KG 3 5KG Power Requirement 100 240V AC 50 60 Auto sensing Layer 2 function Management Interface Console Telnet SSH Web Browser SSL SNMPv1 v2c and v3 Port disable enable Auto negotiation 10 100Mbps full and half duplex mode selection Port configuration Flow Control disable enable Bandwidth control on each port Display each port s speed duplex mode link status Flow control status Port Status Auto negotiation status trunk status VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagged Based VLAN up to 255 VLAN groups 16 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Link Aggregation Supports 8 groups of 8 Port trunk support IEEE 802 3ad LACP QoS Traffic classification based on Port Number 802 1p priority and DS TOS field in IP Packet IGMP Snooping Allow to be disabled or enable Supports IGMP Snooping v1 and v2 SNMP MIBs RFC 1213 MIB 2 RFC 2863 Interface MIB RFC 2665 EtherLike MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Extended Bridge MIB RFC 2819 RMON MIB Group 1 2 3 and 9 RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE Standards Compliance IEEE 802 3 10BASE T IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX 100BASE FX
116. ACL or a MAC based ACL the possible field values are e IP Based ACLs matches packets to IP based ACLs first then matches packets to MAC based ACLs e MAC Based ACLs matches packets to MAC based ACLs first then matches packets to IP based ACLs Matches packets to IP based ACLs first and then matches packets to MAC based ACLs Criteria used to match IP addresses and or MAC addresses with an ACL s address The possible field values are e And both the MAC based and the IP based ACL must match a packet e Or either the MAC based or the IP based ACL must match a packet Matches packets to MAC based ACLs and to IP based ACLs 91 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Aggregate Policer where user defined aggregate policers The Aggregate Policer button opens the New Aggregate Policer screen Aggregate Policer Setting New Aggregate Policer screen see figure 4 46 Add Aggregate Policer Aggregate Policer Name Ingress Committed Information Rate CIR Kbits per second Ingress Committed Burst Size CBS Bytes per second Exceed Action Drop v Add to List Aggregate CIR CBS Exceed Action Policer Name Cancel Figure 4 46 Aggregate Policer Settings screen The page contains the following fields Aggregate Policer Name Where enter a name in this field Ingress Committed This defines the CIR in bits per second This field is only relevant when the Police Information Rat
117. AU etica ii Aita 154 5 3 7 show authentication Methods sranie face ced ce Dees decane a evsenows sus chesbuuoevevseneed aE 155 D328 PASSWOIG pet css ci OOOO cvseane A E sues tvsettpreesuctessebantpheyeuc E E EET 156 5 3 9 enable paS SWOrd scripete tea debe de tate Soe e eo eee aaa Eaa aa E chy ee t rek e adaa aa e aaa 156 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 53 10 USSMMAING vise eevee AOS 157 5 3 11 show USEFS ACCOUNTS es 158 5 4 Address Table Commands sinaia a Genus oia 158 5 421 Dri A atar 158 54 2 bridge multicast filtering occ da sei ee ed A en a re ee 159 5 4 3 bridge multicaSt ad dre eiii ace hee ate asain Ae A eae 160 5 4 4 bridge multicast forbidden AddreSS eee eee ee enneeeceeeeeeeenneeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeesaeeesesaaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeesenaeeeseeeeeeesneeeeeeaas 161 3 4 5 bridge multicast forward unregistered oooocconocccccnnonccononocccnnnoncncnnno cnn nnnn cnn ano n rr rra n nn inr rre 162 5 4 6 bridge multicast forbidden forward UnreGiStered ee eeceeeeececeenneeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeaaeeeseeeeeeesnaeeeeeeaaeeseeeaeeeesnaeeeeeenas 162 5 4 7 bridge multicast forward all rssicon na E Eat 163 5 4 8 bridge multicast forbidden forward 4all ooooooonnncccnonociconoccccnnnonnncnonannnononnncnn nan tu rn narrar nn rre anar rre 164 AD AUN aid 165 DA LO clear DO iii A A ee A eee 165 DAN portSsecU iii A id iaa ee 166 5 4 12 port security routed SECUTe addresS ooooooccccnoconccononcnononononnno conc nono nn nr non n nn nn nn r tania
118. CL Binding Interface O Port ot e O Lac ACL Name O IP Based ACL Y O MAC Based ACL Interface Select ACL v lt gt Cancel Config Figure 4 29 ACL Binding screen 69 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The Page contains the following fields Interface Indicates the interface to which the ACL is bound The selection includes e Port indicates port to apply the ACL e LAG indicates LAG to apply the ACL ACL Name Indicates the ACL which is bound to the interface The selection includes e IP Based ACL e MAC Based ACL Use the Add to List button to add the ACL Binding configuration to the ACL Binding Table at the bottom of the screen 4 7 2 Radius Remote Authorization Dial In User Service RADIUS servers provide additional security for networks RADIUS servers provide a centralized authentication method for web access see figure 4 30 RADIUS a Parameters IP Address 192 168 1 51 Priority lo Authentication Port 1812 Number of Retries 3 Timeout for Reply 3 Sec Dead Time E j Min Key String 12345678 Alpha Numeric Source IP Address 0 0 0 0 Usage Type Login IP Priority Authentica Number of Timeout Dead Source Usage Address tion Port Retries for Reply Time IP Address Type 192 168 1 51 0 1812 3 3 o 0 0 0 0 Login Save Config MM Cancel Config Figure 4 30 RADIUS screen 70 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The Page contains the following fields IP Address Priority
119. Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example all classes of entries in the port lock status are displayed console show ports security 17 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Port status Learning Action Maximum Trap Frequency el Disabled Lock 1 e2 Disabled Lock 1 e3 Disabled Lock 1 e4 Disabled Lock 1 e5 Disabled Lock 1 e6 Disabled Lock 1 e7 Disabled Lock 1 e8 Disabled Lock 1 5 5 Clock Commands 5 5 1 clock set The clock set privileged EXEC command manually sets the system clock Syntax clock set hh mm ss day month year or clock set hh mm ss month day year hh mm ss Current time in hours military format minutes and seconds 0 23 mm 0 59 ss 0 59 day Current day by date in the month 1 31 month Current month using the first three letters by name Jan Dec year Current year 2000 2097 17 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example sets the system time to 13 32 00 on the 7th March 2005 console clock set 13 32 00 7 Mar 2005 5 5 2 clock source The clock source Privileged EXEC command co
120. Config Figure 4 7 Switch Network Setting screen The page includes the following fields Identification System Name Input the system name System Location Input the location where the Switch is located System Contact Input the administrative contact person System Object ID The system object identifier is in this field Base MAC Address Display the MAC address of the Switch m IP Configuration Management VLAN Allow to select the Management VLAN the default Managemanet VLAN is VLAN 1 IP Address Mode Where select Static or Dynamic IP address configuration the Default Mode is Static Host Name This field allows input the DHCP Host Name IP Address Allow input the IP address for a static address the default IP Address is 192 168 1 254 32 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Subnet Mask Allow to input the IP subnet mask address the factory default value is 255 255 255 0 Deafault Gateway Allow to input the default gateway address the factory default value is 0 0 0 0 DNS Server Allow to input the IP Address for the DNS Server The Domain Name System DNS converts user defined domain names into IP addresses 4 2 3 Time In the Basic Setup Table you can see the Time Setup see figure 4 8 by which you can configure the time settings for the Switch You can select SNTP Servers Server1 for the primary SNTP server and Server2 for the secondary SNTP server GQ PLANET e car Setup POR config
121. Config Cancel Config Figure 4 57 IGMP Snooping screen The page contains the following fields a IGMP Global IGMP Snooping Status Indicates if IGMP Snooping is enabled or Disabled on the device E VLAN IGMP Settings VLAN ID Specifies the VLAN ID IGMP Status Auto Learn Host Timeout MRouter Timeout Leave Timeout User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Indicates if IGMP snooping is enabled on the VLAN Indicates if Auto Learn is enabled on the device If Auto Learn is enabled the device automatically learns where other Multicast groups are located Enables or disables Auto Learn on the Ethernet device Indicates the amount of time host waits to receive a message before timing out The default time is 260 seconds Indicates the amount of the time the Multicast router waits to receive a message before it times out The default value is 300 seconds Indicates the time the host waits after requesting to leave the IGMP group and not receiving a Join message from another station before timing out If a Leave Timeout occurs the switch notifies the Multicast device to stop sending traffic The Leave Timeout value is either user defined or an immediate leave value The default timeout is 10 seconds XA Notice IGMP Snooping can be enabled only if Bridge Multicast Filtering is enabled User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 10 2 Bridge Multicast The Bridge Multicast screen see figure 4 58 displ
122. Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines Commands under the interface range context are executed independently on each active interface in the range If the command returns an error on one of the active interfaces it does not stop executing commands on other active interfaces Example The following example shows how ports e1 to e4 and ports g1 to g2 are grouped to receive the same command Console config interface range ethernet e1 e4 g1 g2 Console config if 5 7 3 shutdown The shutdown interface configuration command disables interfaces To restart a disabled interface use the no form of this command Syntax shutdown no shutdown Default Configuration The interface is enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel out of band Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example disables Ethernet e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if shutdown The following example re enables Ethernet port e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if no shutdown 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 7 4 description The description interface configuration command adds a description to an interface To
123. Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines To test optical transceivers ensure a fiber link is present Examples The following example displays the optical transceiver diagnostics console show fiber ports optical transceiver Port Temp Voltage Current Output Input LOS Power Power Power g1 W OK E OK OK OK g2 OK OK OK OK OK OK e3 Copper Temp Internally measured transceiver temperature Voltage Internally measured supply voltage Current Measured TX bias current Output Power Measured TX output power Input Power Measured RX received power Tx Fault Transmitter fault LOS Loss of signal Data ready Indicates transceiver has achieved power up and data is ready N A Not Available N S Not Supported W Warning E Error The following example displays detailed optical transceiver diagnostics console show fiber ports transceiver detailed Port Temp Voltage Current Output Input LOS C Volt mA Power Power User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 mWatt el 48 5 15 50 e2 43 5 15 10 e3 Copper Temp Internally measured transceiver temperature Voltage Internally measured supply voltage Current Measured TX bias current Output Power Measured TX output power Input Power Measured RX received power Tx Fault Transmitter fault LOS Loss of signal
124. D is 1 Press Add to List button to complete this setting O ACL Name Delete ACL Action Source MAC Address Dest MAC Address LAN ID Ether Type Action Source Address Deny 00 11 08 57 E0 1E New ACL Name Deny MAC A Deny Y J0 11 08 57 E0 11 Wild Card Mask 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 4F 1D 9F D wild Card Mask 0 00 00 00 00 00 1 Destination LAN ID Ethertype Address 00 30 4F 1D 9F DE 1 Mi Create Permit MAC ACL and add to list To allow all other packets be forwarded 9 10 11 12 Permit Rule Within the same ACL Deny MAC A choose Action Permit Permit Rule Keep the Source MAC Address and Wild Card Mask be blanked Permit Rule Keep the Destination MAC Address and Wild Card Mask be blanked After click Add to List button the entry would be show at the table 66 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 ACL Name New ACL Name Delete ACL Action Permit LAN ID Ether Type Action Source Destination Address Address Deny 00 11 08 57 E0 1E D00 30 4F 1D 9F DE Permit 13 Please press Save Config to save current setting Binding the MAC ACL to specify interface 14 Select Security ACL Binding in the Menu bar 15 Choose Port g2 from Interface item Source MAC Address Wild Card Mask Dest MAC Address wild Card Mask LAN ID Ethertype 1 16 Choose MAC Based ACL selec
125. Data ready Indicates transceiver has achieved power up and data is ready N A Not Available N S Not Supported W Warning E Error mWatt 1 789 No 1 789 No 5 15 Port Channel Commands 5 15 1 interface port channel The interface port channel global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode of a specific port channel Syntax interface port channel port channel number port channel number A valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Seven supported aggregated links are defined and per port channel up to 4 member ports Turning off auto negotiation of an aggregate link may under some circumstances make it non operational If the other side has auto negotiation turned on it may re synchronize all members of the aggregated link to half duplex operation and may as per User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 the standards set them all to inactive Example The following example enters the context of port channel number 1 Console config interface port channel 1 5 15 2 interface range port channel The interface range port channel global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode to configure multiple port channels Syntax interface range port channel port channel range all port channel range List of port
126. Event Event Entry Community Description Type Owner Displays the event where displays the community to which the event belongs Displays the user defined event description Describes the event type Possible values are e None where indicates that no event occurred e Log indicates that the event is a log entry e Trap indicates that the event is a trap e Log and Trap indicates that the event is both a log entry and a trap Where displays the device or user that defined the event Use the Add to List button when you add the configured RMON event to the Event Table at the bottom of the screen see figure 4 21 The Event Table area contains the following additional field Time Where displays the time that the event occurred 51 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Press the RMON Event Log button to display the log store in the flash Only the Event type is Log or Log and Trap then the entries appear The screen in Figure 4 23 appears PLANET Meteor b Coremosicaion Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security Qos Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin Logout Rmon Events Control Figure 4 23 RMON Event Log Screen 4 5 5 Port Utilization The Port Utilization screen see figure 4 24 indicates the amount of resources each interface is currently consuming Ports in green are functioning normally while ports in red are currently transmitting an excessive amount of network traffic CD PLANET
127. Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example enables the device to use the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP to request and accept Network Time Protocol NTP traffic from servers console config sntp unicast client enable 5 5 13 sntp unicast client poll The sntp unicast client poll global configuration command enables polling for the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP 18 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 predefined unicast clients To disable the polling for SNTP client use the no form of this command Syntax sntp unicast client poll no sntp unicast client poll This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Disabled Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines Polling time is determined by the sntp client poll timer global configuration command Examples The following example enables polling for the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP predefined unicast clients console config sntp unicast client poll 5 5 14 sntp server The sntp server global configuration command configures the device to use the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP to request and accept Network Time Protocol NTP traffic from a server To remove a server from the list of NTP servers use the no form of this command Syntax sntp server p address hostname poll key keyia no s
128. IGMP router or switch asking for a response Query from each host belonging to the multicast group User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 A message sent by a host to the querier to indicate that the host wants to be or is a Report member of a given group indicated in the report message LA message sent by a host to the querier to indicate that the host has quit to be a Leave Group member of a specific multicast group 4 10 1 I GMP Snooping When IGMP Snooping see figure 4 57 is enabled globally all IGMP packets are forwarded to the CPU The CPU analyzes the incoming packets and determines which ports want to join which Multicast groups which ports have Multicast routers generating IGMP queries which routing protocols are forwarding packets and Multicast traffic Ports requesting to join a specific Multicast group issue an IGMP report specifying that Multicast group is accepting members This results in the creation of the Multicast filtering database IGMP Snooping IGMP Global IGMP Snooping Status Ylan IGMP Settings LAN ID 5 IGMP Status Auto Learn v Host Timeout 260 MRouter Timeout 300 omo Leave Timeout O Immediate Leave Update lan IGMP Table Previous Next IGMP a Auto Host MRouter Leave at Snooping Learn Timeout Timeout Timeout Status E eS lt lt OA ES ae 2 Disabled Enabled 260 300 10 Sec 3 Disabled Enabled 260 300 10 Sec Save
129. Indicates system messages and prompts appearing on the console User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Display all When a parameter is required to define a range of ports or parameters and all is an option the default for the command is all when no parameters are defined For example the command interface range port channel has the option of either entering a range of channels or selecting all When the command is entered without a parameter it automatically defaults to all 5 3 AAA Commands 5 3 1 aaa authentication login The aaa authentication login global configuration command defines login authentication To return to the default configuration use the no form of this command Syntax aaa authentication login default ist name method methoa 2 no aaa authentication login default ist name Default Uses the listed authentication methods that follow this argument as the default list of methods when a user logs in listname Character string used to name the list of authentication methods activated when a user logs in method method2 Specify at least one from the following table Keyword Source or destination enable Uses the enable password for authentication line Uses the line password for authentication local Uses the local username database for authentication none Uses no authentication radius Uses the list of all RADIUS servers fo
130. LAN an explicit leave message and query messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below gt gt Non Member Leave Group Stop Timer Leave Group Join Group Send Report Start Timer a lt Query Received Start Timer Delaying Member Idle Member ying Report Received Stop Timer Timer Expried Send report gt IGMP State Transitions IGMP Snooping Configuration The default status of the IGMP Snooping function is disabled To turn on the IGMP Snooping select Enable of the IGMP Snooping Status field and click on the OK button to save 4 3 3 1 IGMP Configuration The switch support IP multicast you can enable IGMP protocol on web management s switch setting advanced page then display the IGMP snooping information in this page you can view difference multicast group VID and member port in here IP multicast addresses range from 224 0 0 0 through 239 255 255 255 The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is an internal protocol of the Internet Protocol IP suite IP manages multicast traffic by using switches routers and hosts that support IGMP Enabling IGMP allows the ports to detect IGMP queries and report packets and manage IP multicast traffic through the switch IGMP have three fundamental types of message as follows Message Description A message sent from the querier
131. LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g1 changed User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 state to down 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g2 changed state to down 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet e3 changed state to down 5 24 10 show logging file The show logging file privileged EXEC command displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the logging file Syntax show logging file Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the logging file Console show logging file Logging is enabled Console logging level debugging Console Messages 0 Dropped severity Buffer logging level debugging Buffer Messages 11 Logged 200 Max File logging level notifications File Messages 0 Dropped severity Syslog server 192 180 2 27 logging errors Messages 6 Dropped severity Syslog server 192 180 2 28 logging errors Messages 6 Dropped severity 2 messages were not logged resources File log 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface FastEthernet g0 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet g0 changed st
132. LIn Leave In Received rLE Leave Empty Received rLA Leave All Received sJE Join Empty Sent sJIn Join In Sent sEmp Empty Sent sLIn Leave In Sent sLE Leave Empty Sent sLA Leave All Sent Port WE rJin rEmp rlin rLE rlLA sJE sJIn sEmp sLin sLE sLA User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 e7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 8 10 show gvrp error statistics The show gvrp error statistics user EXEC command displays GVRP error statistics Syntax show gvrp error statistics ethernet interface port channel port channel number interface Valid Ethernet interface port channel number A valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays GVRP statistics information Console show gvrp error statistics GVRP error statistics Legend INVPROT Invalid Protocol Id INVPLEN Invalid PDU Length INVATYP Invalid Attribute Type INVALEN Invalid Attribute Length INVAVAL Invalid Attribute Value INVEVENT Invalid Event Port INVPROT INVATYP INVAVAL INVALEN INVEVENT el e2 e3 e5 0 0 0 e4 0 0 e6 0 0 e7 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 e8 0 0 0 5 9 IGMP Snooping Commands 5 9 1 ip igmp snooping Global The ip igmp snooping global
133. M PLANET Networking amp Communication WGSW 24026 y MM WGSW 48040 a 24 48 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 2 4 Shared SFP o Witch at NY ALA User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Trademarks Copyright PLANET Technology Corp 2007 Contents subject to which revision without prior notice PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in this manual that is incorrect misleading or inco
134. Number Owner Interface Interval Requested of Samples gl 60 50 50 Test Statistics 5 Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 19 RMON History screen The page contains the following fields E RMON History e Source Interface e Sampling Interval e Sampling Requested e Current Number of Samples e Owner User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Displays the interface from which the history samples were taken The possible field values are Port specifies the port from which the RMON information was taken LAG specifies the port from which the RMON information was taken Indicates in seconds the time that samplings are taken from the ports The field range is 1 3600 The default is 1800 seconds equal to 30 minutes Displays the number of samples to be saved The field range is 1 65535 The default value is 50 Displays the current number of samples taken View History button This button opens the RMON History screen Where displays the RMON station or user that requested the RMON information The field range is 0 20 characters Use the Add to List button when you add the configured RMON sampling to the Log Table at the bottom of the screen E RMON History Table The RMON History screen see figure 4 20 contains interface specific statistical network samplings Each table entry represents all counter values compiled during a single sample RMON History History Entry No v Owner lt lt Pr
135. P Group B has Read Write R W access to Multicast groups Feature access is granted via the MIB name or MIB Object ID refer to figure 4 62 Matwartiog amp Commnicatos View Name Subtree ID Tree View Type Object ID Subtree 1 1 3 6 1 6 3 13 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 1 3 6 1 6 3 18 1 3 6 1 6 3 12 1 2 1 3 6 1 6 3 12 1 3 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 2 12cra1on gt gt 32 The page contains the following fields O Default Y Select from List tcp Included Q PLANET Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS S New View Name A View Type Included Excluded Excluded Excluded Excluded Excluded Excluded Sududod O Insert v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 62 SNMP View screen Indicates the user defined views The options are as follows View Name e Default which displays the default SNMP view for read and read write views e DefaultSuper indicates the default SNMP view for administrator views Subtree ID Tree Indicates the device feature OID included or excluded in the selected SNMP view The options to select the following Subtree Select from List Insert Select the Subtree from the list provided Enables a Subtree not included in the Select from List field to be entered User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 View Type This indicates if the defined OID branch will be included or excluded in the selected SNMP view Add to List Use the button when you w
136. PVID To configure the default VLAN ID use the no form of this command Syntax switchport trunk native vlan vian id no switchport trunk native vlan vlan id Valid VLAN ID of the active VLAN Default Configuration VLAN ID 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines This command has the following consequences incoming untagged frames are assigned to this VLAN and outgoing traffic in this VLAN on this port is sent untagged despite the normal situation where traffic sent from a trunkmode port is all tagged The command adds the port as a member in the VLAN If the port is already a member in the VLAN not as a native it should be first removed from the VLAN Example The following example e8 in trunk mode is configured to use VLAN number 123 as the native VLAN Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport trunk native vlan 123 5 27 11 switchport general allowed vlan The switchport general allowed vlan interface configuration command adds or removes VLANs from a general port Syntax switchport general allowed vlan add vian list tagged untagged switchport general allowed vian remove vian list add vian list List of VLAN IDs to add Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designates a range of IDs remove vian list List of VLAN IDs to remove Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with
137. Permits immediate port re authentication The Setting Timer button opens the Setting Timer screen to configure ports for 802 1x functionality Re authentication 76 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Setting Timer On this screen it includes port re authentication resending EAP Refer to figure 4 33 Port gl Reauthentication Period 3600 Quiet Period 60 Resending EAP 30 Max EAP Requests 2 Supplicant Timeout 30 Server Timeout 30 Figure 4 33 Setting Timer parameter screen The Page contains the following fields Quiet Period Specifies the number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange Range 0 65535 Resending EAP Specifies the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an EAP request identity frame from the supplicant client before resending the requests Max EAP Requests Which the total amount of EAP requests sent If a response is not received after the defined period the authentication process is restarted The field default is 2 retries Supplicant Timeout Which displays the number of seconds that lapses before EAP requests are resent to the supplicant Range 1 65535 The field default is 30 seconds Server Timeout Which specifies the number of seconds that lapses before the switch resends a request to the authentication server Range 1 65535 The field default is 30 seconds 77 User s Manual of WG
138. Port a Spanning e Meneses A Commencaion Setup Config Config Statistics ACL Security Qos Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Port Utilization lt lt Previous Refresh Rate No Refresh Utilization e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Port 93 gt oS 96 g g Mo Hl overloaded 0 0 0 gi0 gli gi2 Save Config J Cancel Config Figure 4 24 Port Utilization screen 52 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The page includes the following fields Refresh Rate Indicates the amount of time that passes before the port utilization statistics are refreshed The possible field values are e No Refresh indicates that the statistics are not refreshed e 15 Sec indicates that the statistics are refreshed every 15 seconds e 30 Sec indicates that the statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds e 60 Sec indicates that the statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds 4 5 6 802 1x Statistics The 802 1X Statistics screen see figure 4 25 contains information about EAP packets received on a specific port PLANET ME Statistics ACL Murio loma Sr conta confio 802 1x Statistics Port jol M Refresh Rate No Refresh v Name Description Packet The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been Received EAPOL Stare received by this Authenticator 0 p The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been Received EAPOL Logaff received by this Authenticator 0 The number of EAPOL frames that have been r
139. SW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 7 5 Port Security Work security screen see figure 4 34 can be increased by limiting access on a specific port only to users with specific MAC addresses MAC addresses can be dynamically learned or statically configured Locked port security monitors both received and learned packets that are received on specific ports Access to the locked port is limited to users with specific MAC addresses These addresses are either manually defined on the port or learned on that port up to the point when it is locked When a packet is received on a locked port and the packet source MAC address is not tied to that port either it was learned on a different port or it is unknown to the system the protection mechanism is invoked and can provide various options Unauthorized packets arriving at a locked port are either Forwarded Discarded with no trap Discarded with a trap Cause the port to be shut down Qos Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Tree e Config Config Statistics ACL Security Interface g v Lock Interface Learning Mode Classic Lock Max Entries Action on Violation Enable Trap Trap Frequency Update lt lt Previous 1 2 Next gt gt Interface Lock Interface Learning Mode Max Entries Action on Violation Enable Trap Trap Frequency 92 Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 g3 Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 g4 Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Disc
140. Syntax back pressure no back pressure Default Configuration Back Pressure is disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines Back Pressure will operate only if duplex mode is set to half Example In the following example Back Pressure is enabled on e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if back pressure 5 7 11 port jumbo frame The port jumbo frame global configuration command enables jumbo frames for the device To disable jumbo frames use the no form of this command Syntax port jumbo frame no port jumbo frame 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration Jumbo Frames are not enabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In the following example Jumbo Frames are enabled on the device Console port jumbo frame 5 7 12 clear counters The clear counters user EXEC mode command clears statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters ethernet interface port channel port channel number Interface Valid Ethernet port port channel number Valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In the following example the c
141. This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state o _ Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets Forwarding the port is forwarding packets Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization switch boot to blocking From blocking to listening or to disabled From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled
142. US security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients e Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information 73 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client a Aut
143. User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The page contains the following fields Global Setting STP Operation Mode BPDU Handling Path Cost Default Values Bridge Settings e Priority e Hello Time e Max Age e Forward Delay This indicates the STP mode by which STP is enabled on the device The possible field values are e Classic STP where enables Classic STP on the device This is the default value e Rapid STP where enables Rapid STP on the device e Multiple STP where enables Multiple STP on the device This determines how BPDU packets are managed when STP is disabled on the port device BPDUs are used to transmit spanning tree information The possible field values are e Filtering where filters BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an interface This is the default value e Flooding where floods BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an interface This specifies the method used to assign default path costs to STP ports The possible field values are e Short specifies 1 through 65 535 range for port path costs This is the default value e Long specifies 1 through 200 000 000 range for port path costs The default path costs assigned to an interface varies according to the selected method Specifies the bridge priority value When switches or bridges are running STP each is assigned a priority After exchanging BPDUs the device with the lowest priority value becomes the Root
144. User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 e Rapid STP which indicates that Rapid STP is enabled on the device e Multiple STP which indicates that Multiple STP is enabled on the device Fast Link This indicates if Fast Link is enabled or disabled for the port or LAG If Fast Link is enabled for a port the port is automatically placed in the forwarding state Port State Indicates if RSTP is enabled on the interface Point to Point Admin Indicates if a point to point links are established or permits the device to establish a oint to point link The possible field values are Status 4 dl A e Auto Point to point links are automatically established by the device e Enabled enables the device to establish a point to point link e Disabled where disables point to point link Point to Point Oper Indicates the Point to Point operating state To run a migration test press Activate next to the Activate Protocol Migration Test field The test sends Link Control Status Protocol LCP packets to test if a data link is enabled To establish communications over a point to point link the originating PPP first sends Link Control XA Notice Protocol LCP packets to configure and test the data link After a link is established and optional facilities are negotiated as needed by the LCP the originating PPP sends Network Control Protocols NCP packets to select and configure one or more network layer protocols When each of the chosen network layer
145. XEC mode User Guidelines The location of a file system dictates the format of the source or destination URL The startup config and the backup config files cannot be copied to the running config file The entire copying process may take several minutes and differs from protocol to protocol and from network to network Filenames cannot be a substring of startup config or running config e g the following filenames are not allowed s st sta File download from a TFTP server may take a long time and therefore fail if there are many Quality of Service elements ACLs policers etc present In this case it is recommended to copy the TFTP file to the backup configuration file and then copy the backup file to the running startup configuration file When using tftp to copy files it is recommended to set the tftp server timeout to 10 20 second The device does not accept new commands while files are being copied however the user does not receive notification that the device is busy copying and will ignore the command Note that this behavior occurs only at the session which initiated the copy command response to activity on other management sessions will result in a delay but will not be ignored When a file is copied to the running configuration file or to the startup configuration file the data in the file is checked If the check fails the file is not downloaded and the user is notified of the error However the
146. a Default Configuration DSA key pairs do not exist Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines DSA keys are generated in pairs one public DSA key and one private DSA key If the device already has DSA keys a warning and prompt to replace the existing keys with new keys is displayed The maximum supported size for the DSA key is 1 024 This command is not saved in the startup configuration however the keys generated by this command are saved in the running configuration which is never displayed to the user or backed up to another device This command may take a considerable period of time to execute DSA key size is 2048 bits Example The following example generates DSA key pairs Console config crypto key generate dsa 5 22 4 crypto key generate rsa The crypto key generate rsa global configuration command generates RSA key pairs Syntax crypto key generate rsa Default Configuration RSA key pairs do not exist Command Mode Global Configuration mode User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines RSA keys are generated in pairs one public RSA key and one private RSA key If the device already has RSA keys a warning and prompt to replace the existing keys with new keys is displayed The maximum supported size for the RSA key is 2048 bits This command is not saved in the startup configuration however the keys generated by this command are saved in the running c
147. a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a Username User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Port is down or not present Interface Reauth 1 e3 3600 State held Tx period 30 Max req 2 Console show dot1x ethernet e3 Admin Mode Oper Mode Reauth Username Control Period Auto Unauthorized Ena Clark Quiet period 60 Login Time n a Last Authentication n a MAC Address 0008 7832 9878 Authentication Method Remote Termination Cause Supplicant logoff The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Interface Admin mode Oper mode Reauth Control Reauth Period Username State Quiet period Tx period Max req Login Time Description The interface number The admin mode of the port Possible values are Force auth Force unauth Auto The oper mode of the port Possible values are Authorized Unauthorized Reauthentication control Reauthentication peiod The User Name representing the identity of the Supplicant The current value of the Authenticator PAE state machine The number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange for example the client provided an invalid password The number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP request identity frame from the client before resending the request The maximum number of times
148. a comma and no spaces A hyphen designates a range of IDs User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 tagged Sets the port to transmit tagged packets for the VLANs If the port is added to a VLAN without specifying tagged or untagged the default is tagged untagged Sets the port to transmit untagged packets for the VLANs Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport general allowed vlan add 2 5 6 tagged 5 27 12 switchport general pvid The switchport general pvid interface configuration command configures the PVID when the interface is in general mode To configure the default value use the no form of this command Syntax switchport general pvid vian id no switchport general pvid vian id PVID Port VLAN ID The vlan id may belong to a non existent VLAN Default Configuration VLAN ID 1 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to configure the PVID for e8 when the interface is in general mode User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040
149. ables cits eavetiitec te czcczed date eE haces 326 UA AA O tesa He eee eee EE eee teecten sees 327 5 26 3 COMMUNES a atthe dci 327 LO A OO Ma zeessetoaes e Na ccd a UR ada Ads 328 5 26 5 exit COMMGUAtiOn NS 328 AS DO cana anna Ae eer nanan ina anid alin aie 329 520 7 O cs aoe naa eed bn ees a pn tae aces 329 208 E OA A A aaa ada aos rada tiernas 330 AA AISO A OS 330 9 20 TO NISTO SIZE A dc 331 5 26 11 SHOW NS O e ade 331 5 26 12 SHOW privile genai a td is da 332 TANE aana ao E EEEE E ET A AE 333 5 2771 vlan database moata wie tent edi en Ge Ve en ee i ee 333 52722 NAN exe Saree oa tev AA AA eatin dae 333 9 27 3 defa lt Vlan disable cocinada ata iria 334 5 2 4 tac Vlan A A A Saeed Nos duet ceed eee eee 335 11 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 27 5 interface range VIAN iii Aaa 335 A a 336 5 27 7 SwitChport MOS init e a DEE 336 5 27 8 switchport ACCESS VAN ici A REIR IRE Raras 337 5 27 9 switchport trunk allowed VISO iii A a aa 338 5 27 10 Switchporttrunk Native VAN occ iien iag i dase deve cmen feng di oeeek aevi i a e 339 5 2711 switchport general allowed Vian iisipin site 339 5 27 12 Sswitchport general pr iia it ii 340 5 27 13 switchport general ingress filtering disable oo noonnccnnnnnniccnononacononcccnnnornnc conca rnnrnnrncnnn non n rr nan nnnrn nn nnr rra 341 5 27 14 switchport general acceptable frame type taggedONlY oocoooccccnnocccnnonoconononcnonononcnn non ncnn ano n nn nono rca ran nnrnnnn rra 3
150. acteristics Server host IP address 192 168 10 1 Authentication port number 20 Timeout period 20 seconds Console config radius server host 192 168 10 1 auth port 20 timeout 20 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 18 2 radius server key The radius server key global configuration command sets the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the router and the RADIUS daemon To reset to the default use the no form of this command Syntax radius server key key string no radius server key key string Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the router and the RADIUS server This key must match the encryption used on the RADIUS daemon The key can be up to 128 characters long Default Configuration The default is an empty string Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example sets the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the device and the RADIUS daemon to abc server Console config radius server key abc server 5 18 3 radius server retransmit The radius server retransmit global configuration command specifies the number of times the software searches the list of RADIUS server hosts To reset the default configuration use the no form of this command Synta
151. address for traffic entering the switch When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports The Dynamic Address screen see figure 4 72 contains parameters for querying information in the Dynamic MAC Address Table including the interface type MAC addresses VLAN and table storing The Dynamic MAC Address table contains information about the aging time before a dynamic MAC address is erased and includes parameters for querying and viewing the Dynamic MAC Address table The Dynamic MAC Address table contains address parameters by which packets are directly forwarded to the ports The Dynamic Address Table can be sorted by interface VLAN and MAC Address Dynamic Address Address Aging 300 Sec Clear Table Query Port Port LAG MAC Address LAN ID Address Table Sort Key VLAN v revious Next LAN ID MAC Port VLAN 1 00 0e a6 0f 8b 92 e8 VLAN 1 00 60 6e 30 25 53 e Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 72 Dynamic Address screen The page contains the following fields Address Aging Specifies the amount of time in seconds the MAC addresses remains in the Dynamic MAC Address table before it times out if no traffic from the source is detected The default value is 300 seconds Clear Table If checked clears the MAC address table
152. ally appealing SNMP e Communicates with switch functions at the Requires SNMP manager software Agent MIB level Least visually appealing of all three methods Based on open standards Some settings require calculations e Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name Table 3 1 Management Methods Comparison 24 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 3 1 1 Administration Console The administration console is an internal character oriented and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can view the administration console from a terminal personal computer Apple Macintosh or workstation connected to the switch s console serial port There are two ways to use this management method via direct access or modem port access The following sections describe these methods For more information about using the console refer to Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Console Management WGSW Managed Switch Serial Port Serial Port 38400 8 n 1 PC Workstation with Terminal emulation software 3 1 2 Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the Switch console serial port When using this management method a null modem cable is required to connect the Swi
153. ample displays the time and date from the system clock Console show clock 15 29 03 Jun 17 2005 18 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 5 16 show sntp configuration The show sntp configuration Privileged EXEC command shows the configuration of the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP use Syntax show sntp configuration This command has no keywords or arguments Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples Console show sntp configuration Polling interval 7200 seconds MD5 Authentication keys 8 9 Authentication is required for synchronization Trusted Keys 8 9 Unicast Clients Polling Enabled Server Polling Encryption Key 176 1 1 8 Enabled 9 176 1 8 179 Disabled Disabled Broadcast Clients Enabled Broadcast Clients Poll Enabled Broadcast Interfaces 1 1 1 3 OOB SNTP servers Server Polling Encryption Key 10 1 1 91 Enabled 9 Broadcast Clients Enabled 18 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Broadcast Clients Poll Enabled Broadcast Interfaces 1 1 1 3 5 5 17 show sntp status The show sntp status Privileged EXEC command shows the status of the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP Syntax show sntp status This command has no keywords or arguments Default Configuration This command has no def
154. ant to add the Views configuration to the Views Table at the bottom of the screen 4 11 3 Group Profile The Group Profile screen see figure 4 63 provides information for creating SNMP groups and assigning SNMP access control privileges to SNMP groups Groups allow network managers to assign access rights to specific device features or features aspects Group Profile Group Name Security Model SNMPy 1 ov Security Level Operation Read Write i Notify Log Table Group Name Security Model Security Level Operation Read Write Notify v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 63 Group Profile screen The page contains the following fields Group Name Displays the user defined group to which access control rules are applied The field range is up to 30 characters Security Model Defines the SNMP version attached to the group The possible field values are e SNMPvi defined for the group e SNMPv2 defined for the group e SNMPv3 defined for the group Security Level Defines the security level attached to the group Security levels apply to SNMPv3 only The possible field values are e No Authentication which indicates that neither the Authentication nor the Privacy security levels are assigned to the group User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 e Authentication which authenticates SNMP messages and ensures the SNMP messages original is authenticated Privacy Whe
155. ard False 10 gs Unlocked Classic Lock y Discard False 10 g6 Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 g7 Unlocked Classic Lock t Discard False 10 g8 Unlocked Classic Lock f Discard False 10 g9 Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 gio Unlocked Classic Lock Discard False 10 gii Unlocked Classic Lock Discard False 10 giz Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 na Save Config J Cancel Config Figure 4 34 Port Security screen Locked port security also enables storing a list of MAC addresses in the configuration file The MAC address list can be restored after the device has been reset Disabled ports are activated from the Port Security page Interface Where displays the port or LAG name Lock Interface Which selecting this option locks the specified interface Learning Mode Where defines the locked port type The Learning Mode field is enabled only if Locked is selected in the Interface Status field The possible field values are e Classic Lock by which locks the port using the classic lock mechanism The port is immediately locked regardless of the number of addresses that have already been learned e Limited Dynamic Lock which locks the port by deleting the current dynamic 78 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 MAC addresses associated with the port The port learns up to the maximum addresses allowed on the port Both relearning and aging MAC addresses are enabled Max Entries Specifies the number
156. arding database are displayed console show bridge address table Aging time is 250 sec vian mac address port type 1 0060 704C 73FF e8 dynamic 1 0060 708C 73FF e8 dynamic 200 0010 0D48 37FF e8 static 5 4 14 show bridge address table static The show bridge address table static privileged EXEC command displays statically created entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show bridge address table static vlan v an ethernet interface port channel port channel number vlan Specific valid VLAN such as VLAN 1 interface A valid Ethernet port port channel number A valid port channel number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example all static entries in the bridge forwarding database are displayed console show bridge address table static Aging time is 300 sec vlan mac address port type 1 0060 704C 73FF e8 permanent 1 0060 708C 73FF e8 delete on timeout 200 0010 0D48 37FF e8 delete on reset 16 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 4 15 show bridge address table count The show bridge address table count privileged EXEC command displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or at a specific VLAN Syntax show bridge address table count vlan vlan vian Specific VLAN Default C
157. arm The falling threshold is graphically presented on top of the graph bars Each monitored variable is designated a color Displays the mechanism in which the alarms are reported The possible field values are e LOG indicates there is not a saving mechanism for either the device or in the management system If the device is not reset the entry remains in the Log Table e TRAP indicates that a SNMP trap is generated and sent via the Trap mechanism The Trap can also be saved using the Trap mechanism e Both indicates that both the Log and Trap mechanism are used to report alarms Displays the trigger that activates the alarm generation Rising is defined by crossing the threshold from a low value threshold to a higher value threshold Defines the alarm interval time in seconds Dhere displays the device or user that defined the alarm Use the Add to List button when you add the RMON Alarms Table entry 50 4 5 4 RMON Events User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The RMON Events screen see figure 4 22 contains fields for defining RMON events Add Event Event Table Event Entry Community Default Community Description Default Community Type None v Owner Add to List Event Community Description Type Time Owner Entry REED RMON Events Log AN Config Statistics ACL Securi RMON Events Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 22 RMON Event screen The page contains the following fields Add
158. asic Mode Trust Mode Trust Mode cos w Figure 4 41 Basic Mode screen The page contains the following fields Trust Mode Displays the trust mode If a packet s CoS tag and DSCP tag are mapped to different queues the Trust Mode determines the queue to which the packet is assigned Possible values are e CoS which sets trust mode to CoS on the device and the CoS mapping determined the packet queue e DSCP sets trust mode to the DSCP on the device The DSCP mapping determines the packet queue 87 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 8 6 Advanced Mode Advanced QoS mode see figure 4 42 provides rules for specifying flow classification and assigning rule actions that relate to bandwidth management The rules are based on the Access Control Lists see Access Control Tab GQ PLANET r j A tomaran Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Advanced Mode Policy Settings Out of Profile DSCP Assignments Select Policy Policy Settings Class Map Settings Class Map Trust C Set F New alue 0 63 Action Police Type Aggregate Policer l Aggregate Policer Settings Ingress Committed Information Rate CIR Kbits per Second Ingress Committed Burst Size CBS i Bytes Exceed Action Interface to Policy Policy Content Class Map Trust Set Attribute Set Value Type 999 CIR CBS Exceed Action
159. asic mode Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines Use no qos trust to disable the trust mode on each port Use qos trust to enable trust mode on each port Example The following example configures port e5 in basic mode to default trust state CoS Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if qos trust 5 17 10 qos cos The qos cos interface configuration command configures the default port CoS value To return to the default setting use the no form of this command Syntax qos cos default cos no qos cos qos cos override User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 default cos Specifies the default CoS value being assigned to the port If the port is trusted and the packet is untagged then the default CoS value becomes the CoS value Range 0 7 Default Configuration Port CoS is 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel command User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures port e5 default CoS value to 3 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if qos cos 3 5 17 11 qos cos override The qos cos override interface configuration command overrides the CoS of incoming packets To disable the override use the no form of this command Syntax qos cos override no qos cos override This command has no arg
160. at the bottom of the screen User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 11 5 Communities The Communities screen contains three areas e Communities e Basic Table e Advanced Table The screens in Figure 4 65 and 4 66 sppears Communities SNMP Management Station Community String Basic Access Mode ReadOnly 7 view Name Advanced Group Name Add to List v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 65 Communities configuration screen The page contains the following fields SNMP Management Defines the management station IP address for which the advanced SNMP Station community is defined There are two definition options e IP Address Define the management station IP address e All which includes all management station IP addresses Community String Defines the password used to authenticate the management station to the device Basic which enables SNMP Basic mode for a selected community and contains the following fields Access Mode Defines the access rights of the community The possible field values are e Read Only which indicates management access is restricted to read only and changes cannot be made to the community e Read Write management access is read write and changes can be made to the device configuration but not to the community e SNMP Admin user has access to all device configuration options as well as permissions to modify the community View Name contains a list of user defined
161. ate nonconsecutive port channels with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of port channels Range Valid Port channel number Default Configuration Forward Command Modes Interface configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines If routers exist on the VLAN do not change the unregistered multicast addresses state to drop on the routers ports Examples This example enables forwarding unregistered multicast addresses within VLAN 8 console config interface vlan 8 console config if bridge multicast forward unregistered add ethernet 1 9 5 4 6 bridge multicast forbidden forward unregistered The bridge multicast forbidden forward unregistered interface configuration command forbids a port to be a Forwarding unregistered multicast addresses port Use the no form of this command to return to default 16 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax bridge multicast forbidden forward unregistered add remove ethernet interface list port channel portchannel number list no bridge multicast forbidden forward unregistered add Forbid forwarding unregistered multicast packets remove Don t forbid forwarding unregistered multicast packets interface list Separate nonconsecutive Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of ports Range Valid Ethernet port port channel number list Separate nonconsecutive port channels
162. ate to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet g1 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet g2 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet e3 changed state to up User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 SYS 5 CONFIG_I Configured from memory by console 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface FastEthernet g0 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g0 changed state to down 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g1 changed state to down 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g2 changed state to down 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet e3 changed state to down 5 24 11 show syslog servers The show syslog servers privileged EXEC command displays the syslog servers settings Syntax show syslog servers Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the syslog server settings Console show syslog servers IP address Port Severity Facility Description 192 180 14 Informational local 7 192 180 2 285 14 Warning local 7
163. ation join leave and leaveall GARP timer values To reset the timer to default values use the no form of this command Syntax garp timer join leave leaveall timer_value no garp timer join Indicates the time in milliseconds that PDUs are transmitted Range 10 2147483640 leave Indicates the amount of time in milliseconds that the device waits before leaving its GARP state The Leave Time is activated by a Leave All Time message sent received and cancelled by the Join message Range 10 2147483640 leaveall Used to confirm the port within the VLAN The time in milliseconds between messages sent Range 10 2147483640 timer_value Timer values in milliseconds Default Configuration The default timer values are as follows Join timer 200 milliseconds Leave timer 600 milliseconds Leavall timer 10000 milliseconds Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet port channel mode User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines The following relationship for the various timer values must be maintained Leave time must be greater than or equal to three times the join time Leaveall time must be greater than the leave time Set the same GARP timer values on all Layer 2 connected devices If the GARP timers are set differently on Layer 2 connected devices GARP application will not operate successfully As the number of dynamic VLANs GVRP increases the leave time sh
164. ault configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example shows the status of the SNTP Console show sntp status Clock is synchronized stratum 4 reference is 176 1 1 8 Reference time is AFE2525E 70597B34 00 10 22 438 PDT Jul 5 1993 Unicast servers Server Preference Status Last response Offset mSec 176 1 1 8 Primary Up AFE252C1 6DBDDFF2 7 33 176 1 8 179 Secondary Unknown AFE21789 643287C9 8 98 Broadcast Interface IP address Last response 176 1 1 8 Primary AFE252C1 6DBDDFF2 18 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 176 1 8 179 Secondary AFE21789 643287C9 5 6 Configuration and I mage Files 5 6 1 copy The copy privileged EXEC command copies files from a source to a destination Syntax copy source url destination url snmp source url The source file location URL or reserved keyword being copied destination url The destination file URL or reserved keyword snmp Used only when copying from to startup config Specifies that the destination source file is inSNMP format The following table displays keywords aliases to URL Keyword Source or destination running config Represents the current running configuration file startup config Represents the startup configuration file backup config Represents the backup configuration file Image The image is executa
165. auto negotiation To select auto ensure negotiation for Flow Control is enabled Example In the following example Flow Control is enabled on e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if flowcontrol on 5 7 9 mdix The mdix interface configuration command enables automatic crossover on a given interface To disable automatic crossover use the no form of this command Syntax mdix on auto no mdix on Manual mdix auto Auto mdi mdix Default Configuration Automatic crossover is enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines Mdix Auto All possibilities to connect a PC with cross OR normal cables are supported and are automatically detected Mdix ON It is possible to connect to a PC only with a normal cable and to connect to another switch ONLY with a cross cable If MDIX is set to no mdix the device works oppostie from the MDIX On behavior It is possible to connect to PC only with cross cable and to connect to another switch ONLY with Normal cable 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Example In the following example automatic crossover is enabled on g2 Console config interface ethernet g2 Console config if mdix auto 5 7 10 back pressure The back pressure interface configuration command enables Back Pressure on a given interface To disable Back Pressure use the no form of this command
166. ays the ports and LAGs attached to the Multicast service group in the Ports and LAGs tables The Port and LAG tables also reflect the manner in which the port or LAGs joined the Multicast group Ports can be added either to existing groups or to new Multicast service groups This screen permits new Multicast service groups to be created also assigns ports to a specific Multicast service address group and included two areas Configuring Multicast and Multicast Table Multicast SNMP Admin Enable Bridge Multicast Filtering LAN ID Bridge Multicast Address Interface 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 static 000000000000 00O0O0OOOOOOOO Dynamic forbidden OO OO OOOCOCOOOOCOOCOCOO0O0O0000 Ne OD ORORO ORORO ORORO ORORO RORO RORORO OROORO RORO RO RORO LAG 1234567 state O00000 00 Dynamic Forbidden oo0oo0o0o0 gt OOO None amp Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 58 Bridge Multicast screen The Page contains the following fields E Configure Multicast Enable Bridge The check box allows enabling Bridge Multicast Filtering function Multicast Filtering VLAN ID This identifies a VLAN to be configured to a Multicast service Bridge Multicast Identifies the Multicast group MAC address IP address Address Interface Displays Interface that can be added to a Multicast service The configuration options are as follows e Static indicates t
167. ble code which is decompressed during system startup into the switching and routing software that manages the device There are always two images stored in the device flash known as image 1 and image 2 The images do not necessarily have to contain the same versions of the software One of these images is always marked as active and the other image serves as a back up The active image is either the last downloaded image or the image configured as the active image The switch boot code first tries to load and run the active image However if the active image is found to be corrupt the boot code tries to load the back up image If the backup image is also corrupt the boot code prompts the user to initiate the Xmodem transfer of a valid image through the serial connection The image file name is in the format 6024_abcd dos where abcd represents the release number boot Boot file The name of the image is in the format 6024_boot_abcd rfb where abcd represents the release number tftp Source or destination URL for a TFTP network server The syntax for this alias is tftp locationJ directory filename 18 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Xmodem Source for the file from a serial connection that uses the Xmodem protocol null Null destination for copies or files A remote file can be copied to null to determine its size Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged E
168. c address no port security routed secure address mac address mac address Specify a MAC address Default Configuration No addresses are defined Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet port channel Cannot be configured for a range of interfaces range context User Guidelines The command enables adding secure MAC addresses to a routed ports in port security mode The command is available when the port is a routed port and in port security mode The address is deleted if the port exits the security mode or is not a routed port Example In this example the MAC layer address 66 66 66 66 66 66 is added to port g1 console config interface ethernet g1 console config if port security routed secure address 66 66 66 66 66 66 5 4 13 show bridge address table The show bridge address table privileged EXEC command displays all entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show bridge address table vlan v an ethernet interface port channel port channel number vlan Specific valid VLAN such as VLAN 1 Interface A valid Ethernet port port channel number A valid port channel number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command 16 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Example In this example all classes of entries in the bridge forw
169. ce A valid Ethernet port User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 port channel number A valid port channel trunk index oob interface Out of band Ethernet port number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privilege EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the status for all configured interfaces Console show interfaces status Port Type Duplex Speed Neg Flow Link Back Mdix Control State Pressure Mode el 100 Full 100 Auto On Up Enable On el 100 Full 100 Off Off Down Disable Off e2 100 Full 100 Off Off Up Disable On Ch Type Duplex Speed Neg Flow Back Link Control Pressure State 1 1000 Full 1000 Off Off Disable Up The displayed port status information includes the following Port The port number Description lf the port has a description the description is displayed Port Type The port designated IEEE shorthand identifier For example 1000Base T refers to 1000 Mbps baseband signaling inluding both Tx and Rx transmissions Duplex Displays the port Duplex status Speed Refers to the port speed Neg Describes the Auto negotiation status Flow Control Displays the Flow Control status Back Pressure Displays the Back Pressure status Link State Displays the Link Aggregation status User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 7 16 show interface
170. cers Displays all the policers configured for this interface their setting and the number of policers currently unused Default Configuration For VLAN interface only the policers option is relevant If no keyword is specified with the show qos interface command the port QoS mode default CoS value DSCPto DSCP mutation map if any attached to the port and policy map if any attached to the interface are displayed If a specific interface is not specified the information for all interfaces is displayed Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays output from the show qos interface ethernet e1 buffers command Console show qos interface ethernet e1 buffers Ethernet e1 Notify Q depth qid Size 1 125 2 125 3 125 4 125 5 125 6 125 7 125 8 125 qid Threshold 1 100 2 100 3 100 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 100 N A N A N A N A ANDO fF qid MinDPO MaxDPO ProbDPO MinDP1 MaxDP1 ProbDP1 MinDP2 MaxDP2 ProbDP2 Weight 1 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 2 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 3 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 4 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 5 50 60 13 65 80 6 85 95 4 2 6 50 60 13 65 80 6 85 95 4 2 7 50 60 13 65 80 6 85 95 4 2 8 50 60 13 65 80 6 85 95 4 2 The following example displays output from the show qos interface ethernet g1 queueing comman
171. ch ports are running GVRP Syntax show gvrp configuration ethernet interface port channel port channel number interface A valid Ethernet interface port channel number A valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to display GVRP configuration information Console show gvrp configuration GVRP Feature is currently enabled on the switch Maximum VLANs 255 Port s GVRP Registration Dynamic Timers Leave Leave Status VLAN milliseconds All Creation Join el Enabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 e4 Enabled Normal Enabled 200 600 10000 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 8 9 show gvrp statistics The show gvrp statistics User EXEC command displays GVRP statistics Syntax show gvrp statistics ethernet interface port channel port channel number interface A valid Ethernet interface port channel number A valid trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows GVRP statistics information Console show gvrp statistics GVRP statistics rJE Join Empty Received rJin Join In Received rEmp Empty Received r
172. cket is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following o One switch is elected as the root switch o The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch o A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root o A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch o Ports included in the STP are selected 93 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network
173. configured to be destination ports The port cannot be already configured as a source port The port cannot be a member in a port channel An IP interface is not configured on the port GVRP is not enabled on the port The port is not a member in any VLAN except for the default VLAN will automatically be removed from the default VLAN The following restrictions apply to ports configured to be source ports Port monitoring Source Ports must be simple ports and not port channels The port cannot be already configured as a destination port All the frames are transmitted as either always tagged or always untagged Refer to the port monitor vlan tagging command below General Restrictions Ports cannot be configured as a group using the interface range ethernet command Note The Port Mirroring target must be a member of the Ingress VLAN of all Mirroring source ports Therefore multicast and broadcast frames in these VLANs are seen more than once Actually N where N is the number of mirroring source ports When both transmit Tx and receive Rx directions of more than one port are monitored the capacity may exceed the bandwidth of the target port In this case the division of the monitored packets may not be equal The user is advised to use caution in assigning port monitoring Example The following example shows how traffic on port e8 source port is copied to port g1 destination port Console config interfac
174. consists of the device host name followed by the angle bracket gt console gt The default host name is Console unless it has been changed using the hostname command in the Global Configuration mode Privileged EXEC Mode Because many of the privileged commands set operating parameters privileged access is password protected to prevent unauthorized use The password is not displayed on the screen and is case sensitive Privileged users are entered directly into the Privileged EXEC mode To enter the Privileged EXEC mode commands from the User EXEC mode perform the following At the prompt enter the command enable and press lt Enter gt A password prompt is displayed Enter the password and press lt Enter gt The password is displayed as The privileged EXEC mode prompt is displayed The Privileged EXEC mode prompt consists of the device host name followed by console 14 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 To return from Privileged mode to User EXEC mode use the following disable commands The following example illustrates how to access Privileged mode and return back to the User EXEC mode console gt enable enter Password console console disable console gt Exit is used to move back from any mode to a previous level mode except from Privileged EXEC to User EXEC mode for example from Interface Configuration mode to Global Configuration
175. d Console show qos interface Ethernet g1 queuing Ethernet g1 wrr bandwidth weights and EF priority qid weights Ef Priority 1 125 dis N A 2 125 dis N A 3 125 dis N A 4 125 dis N A 5 N A ena 5 6 125 dis N A 7 125 dis N A 8 N A ena 8 Cos queue map cos qid NOOO FP WN OO ANDAR N W The following example displays output from the show qos interface g1 shapers command Console show qos interface g1 shapers Ethernet g1 Port shaper enable Committed rate 192000 bps Committed rate 192000 bps Committed burst 9600 bytes qid status Target Committed Target Committed Burst Rate bps bytes 1 Enable 100000 17000 2 Disable N A N A 3 Enable 200000 19000 4 Disable N A N A 5 Disable N A N A User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 6 Disable N A N A 7 Enable 178000 8000 8 Enable 23000 1000 The following example displays output from the show qos interface g1 policers command Console show qos interface ethernet g1 policers Ethernet g1 Class map A Policer type aggregate Committed rate 192000 bps Committed burst 9600 bytes Exceed action policed dscp transmit Class map B Policer type single Committed rate 192000 bps Committed burst 9600 bytes Exceed action drop Class map C Policer type none Committed rate N A Committed burst N A Exceed action N A 5 17 7 qos map dscp queue The qos map dscp queue global configuration command modi
176. d Fragments Jabbers Collisions Frames of xx Bytes User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Indicates the number of fragments packets with less than 64 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Indicates the total number of received packets that were longer than 1518 octets This number excludes frame bits but includes FCS octets that had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral octet Alignment Error number The field range to detect jabbers is between 20 ms and 150 ms Displays the number of collisions received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Number of xx byte frames received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Clear Counters button this option will reset all of the statistic counts Refresh Now button which use this option to refresh the statistics 4 5 2 RMON History The RMON History contains information about samples of data taken from ports For example the samples may include interface definitions or polling periods The RMON History Control screen is divided into RMON History and Log Table Log Table includes the following parts see figure 4 19 Log Table Source Interface O Port lar Y Orac Sampling Interval 1800 E sec Max Number of Samples to Keep 50 Owner Add to List Source Sampling Sampling Current
177. d EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the internal buffer Console show logging Logging is enabled Console logging level debugging Console Messages 0 Dropped severity Buffer logging level debugging Buffer Messages 11 Logged 200 Max File logging level notifications File Messages 0 Dropped severity Syslog server 192 180 2 27 logging errors Messages 6 Dropped severity Syslog server 192 180 2 28 logging errors Messages 6 Dropped severity OOB Syslog server 176 16 8 9 logging errors Messages 6 Dropped severity 2 messages were not logged resources Buffer log 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface FastEthernet g0 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet g0 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet g1 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet g2 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet e3 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 SYS 5 CONFIG_I Configured from memory by console 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface FastEthernet g0 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g0 changed state to down 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39
178. d STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the 97 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward LAN IL Portcast 19 g A Port 3 S Bridge ID 15 r a Port 1 Port2 e i x Portcast 4 gt Portcast 4 Portcast 4 Portcast 4 A gt a oN a gt g gt B Port 1 C Port 1 z d J Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 a g a E D a N Port 2 Pot3 lt Portcast 19 gt Pot2 Port 3 4 8 e 3 E e Portcast 19 Portcast 19 lt _ LAN gt gt A AN I3 gt l gt Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used LAN gt o A Porta SSS Root Bridge dl a Port 1 Port2 u A Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port B Port 4 C Porti El X Designated Bridge Port Port 3 qq __ Bona A Port 2 Porta d z B E 4 J i a w a att lt LAN 2 LAN 3 After Applying the STA Rules The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost be
179. d drive User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Backup This is used to backup the configuration to the local hard drive Source File Type in the name and path of the file or Browse to locate the upgrade file Use the Proceed button to save configuration via TFTP or HHTP that be selected 4 12 8 Jumbo Frame On this screen you can choose the jumbo frame function disable or enable See figure 4 78 ae Confit Statistics ACL Security Qos 3 Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Config Tree Jumbo Frame Jumbo Frames E Figure 4 78 Jumbo Frames screen 4 12 9 Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade screen contains the following fields See figure 4 79 PLANET y TUNEL Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin Logout Firmware Upgrade Next O via TFTP O via HTTP UPGRADE BACKUP File Type software Image Y TFTP Server DA Source File Destination File Figure 4 79 Firmware Upgrade via TFTP User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The page contains the following fields m Via TFTP Via TFTP Defines the upgrade through a TFTP Server File Type Select file type to be upgraded through a TFTP Server The possible field values are e Software Image e Boot Code TFTP Server The TFTP Server IP Address that contains the source file to upgrade from Source File Specifies the name of the upgrade file on the TFTP Server Destination
180. d during this sampling interval that were directed to a multicast address This number does not include packets addressed to the broadcast address The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval in hundredths of a percent Align The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets Alignment Error The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets but were otherwise well formed etherHistoryFragments to increment because it counts both runts which are normal occurrences due to collisions and noise hits Fragments Jabbers Dropped Collisions User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS
181. d network operations Example The following example enables PortFast on e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if spanning tree portfast 5 21 11 spanning tree link type The spanning tree link type interface configuration command overrides the default link type setting To reset the default use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree link type point to point shared no spanning tree spanning tree link type point to point Specifies the port link type as point to point shared Specifies that the port link type is shared Default Configuration The switch derives the link type of a port from the duplex mode A full duplex port is considered a point to point link and a half duplex port is considered a shared link Command Modes Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enables shared spanning tree on e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if spanning tree link type shared 5 21 12 spanning tree pathcost method User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The spanning tree pathcost method command sets the default path cost method To revert to the default setting use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method long Specifies 1 thro
182. dcast Multicast 3289 1287 19 98 2789 2789 20 17 The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history for errors on index number 5 Console show rmon history 5 errors Sample Set 1 Owner CLI Interface 1 g1 Interval 1800 Requested samples 50 Granted samples 50 Maximum table size 500 Time CRC Align Undersize Jan 18 2002 21 57 00 1 1 Jan 18 2002 21 57 30 1 1 Oversize Fragments Jabbers 49 0 0 27 0 0 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history for other on index number 5 Console show rmon history 5 other Sample Set 1 Interface 1 g1 Requested samples 50 Granted samples 50 Maximum table size 500 Time Dropped Collisions Jan 18 2002 21 57 00 3 0 Jan 18 2002 21 57 30 3 0 Owner CLI Interval 1800 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Time Octets Packets Broadcast Multicast Utilization CRC Undersize Oversize Description Date and Time the entry is recorded The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The number of packets including bad packets received during this sampling interval The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the broadcast address The number of good packets receive
183. de User Guidelines The default and optional list names created with the aaa authentication enable command are used with the enable authentication command Create a list by entering the aaa authentication enable ist name method command where list name is any character string used to name this list The method argument identifies the list of methods that the authentication algorithm tries in the given sequence The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error not if it fails To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error specify none as the final method in the command line All aaa authentication enable default requests sent by the router to a RADIUS server include the username enabx where x is the requested privilege level Example The following example sets authentication when accessing higher privilege levels console config aaa authentication enable default enable 5 3 3 login authentication The login authentication line configuration command specifies the login authentication method list for a remote telnet or console To return to the default specified by the authentication login command use the no form of this command Syntax login authentication default ist name no login authentication default Uses the default list created with the authentication login command list name Uses the indicated list c
184. debugging 5 24 5 logging buffered size The logging buffered size global configuration command changes the number of syslog messages stored in the internal buffer To return the number of messages stored in the internal buffer to the default value use the no form of this command Syntax logging buffered size number no logging buffered size number Numeric value indicating the maximum number of messages stored in the history table Range 20 400 Default Configuration The default number of messages is 200 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example changes the number of syslog messages stored in the internal buffer to 300 Console config logging buffered size 300 5 24 6 clear logging The clear logging privileged EXEC command clears messages from the internal logging buffer Syntax clear logging Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example clears messages from the internal syslog message logging buffer Console clear logging Clear logging buffer y n y 5 24 7 logging file The logging file global configuration command limits syslog messages sent to the logging file based
185. defined in the map protocol protocols group command Range 1 2147483647 vian id Define the VLAN ID in the classifying rule Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example sets a protocol based classification rule of protocol group 1 to VLAN 8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport general map protocols group 1 vlan 8 5 27 18 ip internal usage vlan The ip internal usage vlan interface configuration command reserves a VLAN as the internal usage VLAN of an interface Use the no form of this command to reset to default Syntax ip internal usage vlan vian id no ip internal usage vlan vlan id VLAN ID of the internal usage VLAN Range Valid VLAN Default Configuration This command has no default configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet port channel User Guidelines An internal usage VLAN is required when an IP interface is defined on Ethernet port or Port channel Using this command the user can define the internal usage VLAN of a port If an internal usage is not defined for a Port and the user wants to define an IP interface the software chooses one of the unused VLANs If a VLAN ID was chosen by the
186. device switches to DST at 2 a m on the first Sunday of April and reverts to standard time at 2 a m on the last Sunday of October e European The device switches to DST at 1 00 am on the last Sunday in March and reverts to standard time at 1 00 am on the last Sunday in October The European option applies to EU members and other European countries using the EU standard e Other The DST definitions are user defined based on the device locality If Other is selected the From and To fields must be defined For non USA and European countries the amount of time for DST can be set in minutes The value range is 1 1440 The default time is 60 minutes Defines the time that DST begins in countries other than USA or Europe in the format DayMonthYear in one field and time in another For example DST begins on the 25th October 2007 5 00 am the two fields will be 250ct07 and 5 00 The possible field values are e Date The date at which DST begins The possible field range is 1 31 e Month The month of the year in which DST begins The possible field range is Jan Dec e Year The year in which the configured DST begins e Time The time at which DST begins The field format is Hour Minute for example 05 30 Defines the time that DST ends in countries other than USA or European in the format DayMonthYear in one field and time in another For example DST ends on the 23rd March 2008 12 00 am the two fields will be 23Mar08 and 12 00
187. ds Interface Displays the interface to which the entry refers e Port to which the specific port number the forwarding database parameters refer e LAG to which the specific LAG number the forwarding database parameters refer MAC Address which displays the MAC address to which the entry refers VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID number to which the entry refers VLAN Name Which displays the VLAN name to which the entry refers Status Displays how the entry was created The possible field values are e Permanent the MAC address is permanent e Delete on Reset the MAC address is deleted when the device is reset e Delete on Timeout the MAC address is deleted when a timeout occurs e Secure the MAC Address is defined for locked ports m Query Port Specifies the interface is queried There are two interface types from which to select e Port displays the specific port number e LAG the specific LAG number MAC Address Specifies the MAC address for which the table is queried VLAN ID which specifies the VLAN ID for which the table is queried Address Table Sort Specifies the means by which the Dynamic MAC Address Table is sorted The address table can be sorted by Key e VLAN e Address e Interface Add to List Use the button to apply the static MAC address settings User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 12 3 Dynamic Address The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source
188. ds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange with the client Range 0 65535 seconds Default Configuration 60 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet User Guidelines During the quiet period the switch does not accept or initiate any authentication requests The default value of this command should only be changed to adjust for unusual circumstances such as unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers If it is necessary to provide a faster response time to the user a smaller number than the default should be entered Examples The following example sets the number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 exchange to 3600 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if dot1x timeout quiet period 3600 5 29 8 dot1x timeout tx period The dot1x timeout tx period interface configuration command sets the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP request identity frame from the client before resending the request Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x timeout tx period seconds no dot1x timeout tx period seconds Time in seconds that the switch should wait for a response to an EAP request ident
189. e CIR value is Single Ingress Committed Burst This defines the CBS in bytes per second This field is only relevant when the Size CBS Exceed Action Police value is Single Action assigned to incoming packets exceeding the CIR This field is only relevant when the Police value is Single Possible values are e Drop which drops packets exceeding the defined CIR value e Remark DSCP where remarks packet s DSCP values exceeding the defined CIR value e None forwarding packets exceeding the defined CIR value 92 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 9 Spanning Tree Theory of Spanning Tree Protocol The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1W Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorith
190. e show ports jumbo frame Jumbo frames are disabled User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Jumbo frames will be enabled after reset 5 7 19 port storm control broadcast enable The port storm control broadcast enable interface configuration command enables broadcast storm control To disable broadcast storm control use the no form of this command Syntax port storm control broadcast enable no port storm control broadcast enable Default Configuration Broadcast storm control is disabled Command Modes Interface Configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines Use the port storm control broadcast rate interface configuration command to set the maximum allowable broadcast rate Multicast can be counted as part of the storm frames if the port storm control include multicast global configuration command is already executed Example The following example enables broadcast storm control on port e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if port storm control broadcast enable 5 7 20 port storm control broadcast rate The port storm control broadcast rate interface configuration command configures the maximum broadcast rate Use the no form of this command to configure the default value port storm control broadcast rate rate no port storm control broadcast rate rate Maximum of kilobytes per second of broadcast and multicast traffic on a port Rate 70 10000
191. e 4 67 permits filtering traps based on OIDs Each OID is linked to a device feature or a feature aspect The Notification Filter screen also allows network managers to filter notifications Notification Filter Filter Name New Filter Name A interfaces n New Object Identifier Tree Select from List ip Object ID ltcp Filter Type Included Add to List Object ID Subtree Filter Type Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 67 Notification Filter screen The page contains the following fields Filter Name This contains a list of user defined notification filters New Filter Name Add a new user defined notification filter name New Object Identifier Displays the OID for which notifications are sent or blocked If a filter Subtree is attached to an OID traps or informs are generated and sent to the trap recipients Object IDs are selected from either the Select from List or the Object ID List There are two configuration options Select from List select the OID from the list provided Object ID you can enter an OID not offered in the Select from List option Filter Type Indicates if informs or traps are sent regarding the OID to the trap recipients Excluded Restricts sending OID traps or informs Included Sends OID traps or informs Add to List eet ee ee Use the button when you want to add the Notification Filter configuration to the Notification Filter Table at the bottom of the screen
192. e Disable w Current Back Pressure Disable Flow Control Disable v Current Flow Control Disable MDI MDIX AUTO y Current MDI MDIX MDIX PYE None w LAG Figure 4 10 Per Port Configuration detail screen The Port Configuration screen contains the following fields Port Indicates the number of each port Description Where can be entered by clicking on the Detail button Port Type Display the port type of each port Admin Status The port can be taken offline by selecting the Down option When Up is selected the port can be accessed normally Current Port Status Display current status of the each port Reactivate Suspended Port To reactivate a port that has been suspended click the check box 37 Operational Status Admin Speed Current Port Speed Admin Duplex Current Duplex Mode Auto Negotiation Current Auto Negotiation Admin Advertisement Current Advertisement Neighbor Advertisement Back Pressure Current Back Pressure Flow Control Current Flow Control MDI MDIX Current MDI MDIX PVE User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 This indicates the port is active or not Change the speed of each port Display current speed of each port Change the duplex mode of each port Display current duplex mode of each port Allow enable or disable per port s Auto Negotiation feature If using an SFP module Auto Negotiation for the specific port should be set to disable Display current setting of the port s Auto Nego
193. e This is the last time the port was tested Cable Length This is the approximate length of the cable The Cable Length test can be performed only when the port is up and operating at 1Gbps User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 12 7 Save Configuration On this screen you can choose two methods to save the configuration Via TFTP Upgrade and Via HTTP See figure 4 76 CDELONCT eRe cee ETE ronin eee Save Configuration O via TFTP O via HTTP UPGRADE BACKUP File Type Configuration TFTP Server Source File Destination File Figure 4 76 Save Configuration via TFTP The page contains the following fields Via TFTP Via TFTP Upgrade Select this option to upgrade the switch from a file located on a TFTP Server TFTP Server The TFTP Server IP Address that contains the source files to upgrade from Source File Specifies the name of the upgrade file on the TFTP Server Destination File Where specifies the name of the configuration file The default is StartupCfg m Via HTTP This HTTP Firmware Upgrade screen is used for saving configuration information using your Web browser See figure 4 77 Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin logout Save Configuration UPGRADE BACKUP Source File Browse Figure 4 77 Save Configuration via HTTP Upgrade Select this option to upgrade the switch from a file on the local har
194. e ethernet g1 Console config if port monitor e8 5 16 2 show ports monitor The show ports monitor user EXEC command displays the port monitoring status Syntax show ports monitor Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Example The following example shows how the port copy status is displayed Console show ports monitor Source Port Destination Port Type Status 1 1 1 8 RX TX Active 1 2 1 8 RX TX Active 1 18 1 8 Rx Active VLAN Tagging No No No User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 17 QoS Commands 5 17 1 qos The qos global configuration command enables quality of service QoS on the device and enters QoS basic or advanced mode Use the no form of this command to disable the QoS features on the device Syntax qos advanced no qos advanced QoS advanced mode which enables the full range of QoS configuration Default Configuration By default QoS is enabled in basic mode Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command However switching to Basic qos mode sets the trust mode to cos Example The following example shows how QoS is enabled on the device in basic mode Console config qos 5 17 2 show qos The show qos use
195. e network or memory in the switch is a concern and notification is not required traps should be used To define an SNMP recipient on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Use only unicast IP addresses Example The following example enables SNMP traps for host 10 1 1 1 with community string management using SNMPv2 Console config snmp server host 10 1 1 1 management 2 5 20 7 snmp server set The snmp server set global configuration command sets SNMP MIB value by the CLI Syntax snmp server set variable name name1 value name2 value2 variable name MIB variable name name value List of name and value pairs In case of scalar MIBs there is only a single pair of name values In case of entry in a table the first pairs are the indexes followed by one or more fields Default Configuration This command has no default configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Although the CLI can set any required configuration there might be a situation where a SNMP user sets a MIB variable that does not have an equivalent command In order to generate configuration files that support those situations the snmp server set command is used This command is context sensitive Examples The following example sets the scalar MIB sysName to have the value abc Console config snmp
196. e sent to the remote server If you want to add the Server Log configuration to the Server Log Table use the Add to List button at the bottom of the screen XA Notice When a severity level is selected all severity level choices above the selection are selected automatically 4 12 13 Memory Logs The Memory Log screen see figure 4 84 contains all system logs in a chronological order that are saved in RAM Cache Log Index which shows the log number Log Time at which the log was generated Severity which shows the log severity and the description that shows log message text PLANET APA e ities Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogQut Previous Next gt gt 10 2147483622 01 Jan 2000 04 19 41 Informational 11 2147483623 01 Jan 2000 04 19 35 Informational 12 2147483624 01 Jan 2000 04 00 58 Informational e Log Index Log Time Severity Description 1 2147483613 01 Jan 2000 09 06 25 Informational OAT CONECT NAA ER connection for user admin source 192 168 1 51 destinati of AA 1 CONNECT New http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED Yo AA 1 CONNECT New http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED St AAA I DISCONNECT http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinatio n 192 168 1 254 TERMINATED gt AAA I CONNECT New http connection for
197. e show lacp ethernet privilege EXEC command displays LACP information for Ethernet ports Syntax show lacp ethernet interface parameters statistics protocol state Interface Ethernet interface Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privilege EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to display LACP statistics information Console show lacp ethernet el statistics User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Port e1 LACP Statistics LACP PDUs sent 2 LACP PDUs received 2 5 11 5 show lacp port channel The show lacp port channel privileged EXEC command displays LACP information for a port channel Syntax show lacp port channel port_channel_number port _channel_number The port channel number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to display LACP port channel information Console show lacp port channel 1 Port Channel 1 Port Type 1000 Ethernet Actor System Priority 1 MAC Address 000285 0E1C00 Admin Key 29 Oper Key 29 Partner System Priority 0 MAC Address 000000 000000 Oper Key 14 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 12 Line Commands 5 12 1
198. eceived by Received EAPOL Invalid this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have pecetved EAROLTOtH been received by this Authenticator E E The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been Received EAP Resp Id received by this Authenticator 0 The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Received EAP Resp Oth Resp Id frames that have been received by this 0 Authenticator The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by Received EAP LenError this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field 0 is invalid Received Last EAPOL Ver The protocol version number carried in the most recently o received EAPOL frame Received Last EAPOL Src The source MAC address carried in the most recently 00 00 00 00 00 00 received EAPOL frame The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been o transmitted by this Authenticator The number of EAP Reg Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator The number of EAP Request frames other than Ra Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Transmit EAPOL Total Transmit EAPOL Id 0 Transmit EAPOL Oth D Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 25 802 1x Statistics screen 53 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The page includes the following fields Port Indicates the port which is polled for statistics Refresh Rate Indicates the amount of time that passes before the EAP statist
199. ecific port To enable spanning tree on a port use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree disable no spanning tree disable User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration By default all ports are enabled for spanning tree Command Modes Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example disables spanning tree on e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if spanning tree disable 5 21 8 spanning tree cost The spanning tree cost interface configuration command configures the spanning tree path cost for a port To reset the default port path cost use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree cost cost The port path cost Range 1 200 000 000 Default Configuration The default costs are as follows Port Channel 20 000 1000 mbps giga 20 000 100 mbps 200 000 10 mbps 2 000 000 Command Modes Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines The method used long or short is set by using the spanning tree pathcost method command Example The following example configures the spanning tree cost on e5 to 35000 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if spanning tree cost 35000 5 21 9
200. ed STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 8 g8 Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 9 go Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 10 g10 Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 11 ali Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 12 giz Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 51 RSTP Port Settings screen The page contains the following fields Interface Where displays the port or LAG on which Rapid STP is enabled Role Where indicates the port role assigned by the STP algorithm in order to provide to STP paths The possible field values are e Root where provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root switch e Designated where indicates that the port or LAG via which the designated switch is attached to the LAN e Alternate which provides an alternate path to the root switch from the root interface e Backup which provides a backup path to the designated port path toward the Spanning Tree leaves Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a loop by a point to point link Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or more connections connected to a shared segment e Disabled which indicates the port is not participating in the Spanning Tree Mode Where indicates the current Spanning Tree mode The Spanning Tree mode is selected in the Global STP screen The possible field values are e Classic STP which indicates that Classic STP is enabled on the device
201. ed client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 75 HM 802 1X Settings of WGSW Switch User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Port based authentication enables authenticating system users on a per port basis via an external server Only authenticated and approved system users can transmit and receive data Ports are authenticated via the RADIUS
202. ed from the current value and the difference compared with the thresholds The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold and startup alarm is equal to rising or rising and falling then a single rising alarm is generated If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold and startup alarm is equal falling or rising and falling then a single falling alarm User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 is generated Rising Threshold A sampled statistic threshold When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold and the value at the last sampling interval is less than this threshold a single event is generated Falling Threshold Asampled statistic threshold When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold and the value at the last sampling interval is greater than this threshold a single event is generated Rising Event The event index used when a rising threshold is crossed Falling Event The event index used when a falling threshold is crossed 5 19 8 rmon event The rmon event global configuration command configures an event To remove an event use the no form of this command Syntax rmon event index type community text description text owner name no rmon event index index The event index Range 1 65535 type The type of notification that the device generates about
203. editing the CLI commands The following table describes the CLI shortcuts Keyboard Key Description Up arrow key Recalls commands in the history buffer beginning with the most recent command Repeat the key sequence to recall successively older commands Down arrow key Returns to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with the up arrow key Repeating the key sequence will recall successively more recent commands Ctri A Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line Ctrl E Moves the cursor to the end of the command line Ctrl Z End Returns back to the Privileged EXEC mode from all modes Backspace key Moves the cursor back one space Cu Command Conventions When entering commands there are certain command entry standards which apply to all commands The following table describes the command conventions Convention Description In a command line square brackets indicate an optional entry In a command line curly brackets indicate a selection of compulsory parameters separated by the character One option must be selected For example flowcontrol auto on off means that for the flowcontrol command either auto on or off must be selected Italic font Indicates a parameter lt Enter gt Any individual key on the keyboard For example click lt Enter gt Ctrl F4 Any combination keys pressed simultaneously on the keyboard Screen
204. em auto control Syntax This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Disabled Command Modes Global configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example enables 802 1x globally Console config dot1x system auto control 5 29 3 dot1x port control The dot1x port control interface configuration command enables manual control of the authorization state of the port Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x port control auto force authorized force unauthorized no dot1x port control auto Enable 802 1X authentication on the interface and cause the port to transition to the authorized or unauthorized state based on the 802 1X authentication exchange between the switch and the client User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 force authorized Disable 802 1X authentication on the interface and cause the port to transition to the authorized state without any authentication exchange required The port resends and receives normal traffic without 802 1X based authentication of the client force unauthorized Deny all access through this interface by forcing the port to transition to the unauthorized state ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate The switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface Default Configuration f
205. empt to retrieve a DHCP address This could result in one of the following The same IP address may be assigned Adifferent IP address may be assigned which could result in loss of connectivity to the management station The DHCP server may be down which would result in IP address retrieval failure and possible loss of connectivity to the management station Example The following example acquires an IP address from DHCP Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp 5 10 3 ip default gateway The ip default gateway command defines a default gateway router To remove the default gateway use the no form of this command Syntax ip default gateway ip address no ip default gateway p address Valid IP address that specifies the IP address of the default gateway Default Configuration No default gateway is defined Command Mode Interface configuration User Guidelines User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The setting of the default gateway on the out of band port must not precede the assignment of the IP address Always assign the IP address to the out of band port first and then set the default gateway Example The following example defines an ip default gateway Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 1 5 10 4 show ip interface The show ip interface user EXEC command displays the usability status of interfaces configured for IP
206. end station e MDIX if the port is connected to a hub or another switch Display the current MDI MDIX status on each port For Gigabit Ethernet switches ONLY When a port is a Private VLAN Edge PVE port it bypasses the Forwarding Database and forwards all unicast multicast and broadcast traffic to an uplink Uplinks can be ports or LAGs After setup complete please click the Save button to save your changes 4 3 2 Link Aggregation When you enter the Link Aggregation the screen appears in figure 4 11 such as LAG shows whether the port is part of a LAG 38 GQ PLANET Metwortieg amp Conmmenicaton T ort contig ee T E OO OOOO LAI olw oln e ww Ne User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Link Aggregation G Description aion Type ake Speed Duplex Flow Control LAG Mode Detail up E Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Detail Up Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Detail Up v Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Detail Up w Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Detail Up v Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Detail Up Ml Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Detail Up y Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Detai Up B Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Detail Figure 4 11 Switch Link Aggregation screen The Link Aggregation page contains the following fields LAG Description Admin Status Type Link Status Speed Duplex Flow con
207. er s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 4 1 Create VLAN In this table the information and global parameters for configuring and working with VLAN s will be provided see figure 4 14 ANET SS a PLANET Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Create VLAN A Single YLAN LAN ID 2 4094 LAN Name VLAN Table LAN ID LAN NAME Status 1 Default 2 VLAN_2 Static 3 VLAN_3 Static Total existing VLANs 1 v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 14 Switch Create VLAN screen The page contains the following fields Single VLAN VLAN ID 2 4094 You can configure the ID number of the VLAN by this item Up to 256 VLANs can be created This field is used to add VLANs one at a time If you want to add the defined VLAN ID number you can press the Add button VLAN Name Where shows the user defined VLAN name VLAN Range Indicates a range of VLANs configured To add the defined range of VLAN ID numbers press the Add Range button E VLAN Table The VLAN Table displays a list of all configured VLANs include the e VLAN ID e VLAN Name e Status To remove a VLAN click the Remove button 42 4 4 2 Port setting User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 In this port setting screen refer to figure 4 15 the parameters managing ports that are part of a VLAN will be provided and you can set the default VLAN ID PVID All untagged packets arriv
208. erated DSA DSS key was generated SSH Public Key Authentication is enabled Active incoming sessions IP address SSH username Version Cipher Auth Code 172 16 0 1 John Brown 2 03 DES HMAC SH1 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description IP address Client address SSH username User name Version SSH version number Cipher Encryption type 3DES Blowfish RC4 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Auth Code Authentication Code HMAC MD5 HMAC SHA1 5 22 10 show crypto key mypubkey The show crypto key mypubkey privileged EXEC command displays the SSH public keys on the device Syntax show crypto key mypubkey rsa dsa rsa RSA key dsa DSA key Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the SSH public keys on the device Console show crypto key mypubkey rsa RSA key data 005C300D 06092A86 4886F70D 01010105 00034B00 30480241 00C5E23B 55D6AB22 04AEF1BA A54028A6 9ACC01C5 129D99E4 64CAB820 847EDAD9 DFOB4E4C 73A05DD2 BD62A8A9 FA603DD2 E2A8A6F8 98F76E28 D58AD221 B583D7A4 71020301 87685768 Fingerprint Hex 77 C7 19 85 98 19 27 96 C9 CC 83 C5 78 89 F8 86 Fingerprint Bubble Babble yteriuwt jgkljnglk yewiury hdskjfryt gfhkjglk 5 22 1
209. es for this command Example The following example configures e8 to discard untagged frames at ingress Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport general acceptable frame type tagged only 5 27 15 switchport forbidden vlan The switchport forbidden vlan interface configuration command forbids adding specific VLANs to a port This may be used to prevent GVRP from automatically making these VLANs active on the selected ports To revert to allowing the addition of specific VLANs to the port use the remove parameter for this command Syntax switchport forbidden vlan add vian list remove vian list add vian list List of VLAN IDs to add to the forbidden list Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designates a range of IDs remove vian list List of VLAN IDs to remove from the forbidden list Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designates a range of IDs Default Configuration All VLANs allowed Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example forbids adding VLANs number 234 till 256 to e8 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport forbidden vlan add 234 256 5 27 16 map protocol protocols group The map
210. es the following Generates an internal security name Maps the internal security name for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 security models to the group name To define a management station on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ipaddress For a user to define OOB management port configurations such as ip address default gateway RADIUS and so forth you must define two SNMP communities A super user can configure OOB management port settings with a single community by switching between the two communities The OOB ip address indicates whether the selected management station being configured is an OOB management station The type is used for a different purpose From an SNMP perspective the OOB port is treated as a separate device Therefore when defining an SNMP community the administrator must indicate which tables are being configured If type is oob this indicates that OOB tables are being configured If type is router it means that the device s tables are being configured User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration No community is defined Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets up the community access string public to permit administrative access to SNMP protocol at an administrative station with the IP address 192 168 1 20 Console config snmp server community public
211. estination A Delete ACL Action Protocol Select from List Protocol ID To Match Set i Set e Set E Y TCP Flags da JE _Mijadk 5 sh 2 Rst Set__ Billsym Set__ rin Set Source Port Any Destination Port 5 Any Source IP Address a wild Card Mask E d Destination IP Address wild Card Mask Match DSCP Match IP Precedence O Add to List 172 16 0 0 Delete 61 mM Create Permit ACL and add to list ONE 0 o User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Permit Rule Within the same ACL Deny IP Destination A choose Action Permit Permit Rule Keep the Source IP Address and Wild Card Mask be blanked Permit Rule Keep the Destination IP Address and Wild Card Mask be blanked After click Add to List button the entry would be show at the table Rember to click the Save Config button Delete ACL Action Protocol TCP Flags Source Port Match DSCP Action Deny Permit O ACL Name Destination Port Source IP Address Destination IP Address Match IP Precedence Protocol Any Any Source Port New ACL Name Permit BSJ Select from List Any M O Protocol ID To Match Urg Ack Psh Rst Syn Fin TT any or Wild Card Mask wild Card Mask Add to List Destination Source Destination Match Match Port IP Address IP DSCP IP Address Precedence 172 16 0 0 Binding the IP ACL to specify interface
212. et in the VLAN header QoS refers to Layer 2 traffic and above QoS handles per flow settings even within a single traffic class The CoS Settings screen see figure 4 37 contains fields for enabling or disabling CoS In addition the Trust mode can be selected The Trust mode relies on predefined fields within the packet to determine the egress queue settings To configure the Trust Mode see 4 8 5 The CoS Settings screen has two areas CoS Settings and CoS to Queue 82 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 CoS Settings QoS Mode Basic v Class of Service Queue 0 2 5 1 15 2 10 3 2 4 3 5 3 5 6 4 vw 7 4 Restore Defaults CoS Default lt lt Previous 1 2 3 Next gt gt Interface Default CoS Restore Defaults LAG gl 0 iM g2 lo g3 o ball ot Lo 65 95 ow g6 o x E o gs o g9 o aid lo git lov giz lav v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 37 CoS Settings screen The Page contains the following fields CoS Mode This indicates if QoS is enabled on the interface The possible values are e Disable disables QoS on the interface e Basic enables QoS on the interface e Advanced enables the Advanced Mode QoS on the interface Class of Service Specifies the CoS priority tag values where zero is the lowest and 7 is the highest Queue Defines the traffic forwarding queue to which the CoS
213. et the command history buffer size to the default use the no form of this command Syntax history size number of commands no history size number ofcommands Number of commands that the system records in its history buffer Range 10 216 Default Configuration The default history buffer size is 10 Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example changes the command history buffer size to 100 entries for a particular line Console config line history size 100 5 26 11 show history The show history user EXEC command lists the commands entered in the current session User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax show history Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC command mode User Guidelines The commands are listed from the first to the latest command The buffer is kept unchanged when entering to configuration mode and returning back Example The following example displays all the commands entered while in the current privileged EXEC mode Console show history show version show clock show history 5 26 12 show privilege The show privilege user EXEC command displays the current privilege level Syntax show privilege Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC com
214. etting use the no form of this command Syntax exec timeout minutes seconds no exec timeout minutes Integer that specifies the number of minutes Range 0 65535 seconds Additional time intervals in seconds Range 0 59 Default Configuration The default configuration is 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines To specify no timeout enter the exec timeout 0 command Examples The following example configures the interval that the system waits until user input is detected to 20 minutes Console config line console Console config line exec timeout 20 5 12 4 show line The show line user EXEC command displays line parameters Syntax show line console telnet ssh console Console terminal line telnet Virtual terminal for remote console access Telnet ssh Virtual terminal for secured remote console access SSH Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays the line configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console show line Console configuration Interactive timeout 20 History 10 Baudrate 38400 Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 Telnet configuration Interactive timeout 10 minutes 10 seconds History 10 SSH conf
215. everity determines the set of event logging devices that are sent per each event logging The page contains the following fields Logging Indicates if device global logs for Cache File and Server Logs are enabled Console logs are enabled by default Emergency The system is not functioning Alert The system needs immediate attention Critical The system is in a critical state Error A system error has occurred User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Warning A system warning has occurred Notice The system is functioning properly but system notice has occurred Informational Provides device information Debug Provides detailed information about the log If a Debug error occurs contact Customer Tech Support 4 12 5 Port Mirroring Port mirroring monitors and mirrors network traffic by forwarding copies of incoming and outgoing packets from one port to a monitoring port Port mirroring can be used as diagnostic tool and or a debugging feature Port mirroring also enables switch performance monitoring refer to figure 4 74 Network administrators configure port mirroring by selecting a specific port to copy all packets and different ports from which the packets are copied IMP Admin E Source Port Type Boh v Target Port Source Port Type Target Port el Both e2 v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 74 Port Mirroring screen The page contains the following fields Source Port Defines the port
216. evious Next gt gt Sample Received Received Broadcast Multicast CRC Align Undersize Oversize Fragments Jabbers No Bytes Packets Packets Packets Errors Packets Packets Octets RMON History Control Figure 4 20 RMON History Table screen 48 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The page contains the following fields Sample No Indicates the sample number from which the statistics were taken Received Bytes Octets Displays the number of octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed This number includes bad packets and FCS octets but excludes framing bits Received Packets Displays the number of packets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed including bad packets Multicast and Broadcast packets Broadcast Packets Displays the number of good Broadcast packets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed This number does not include Multicast packets Multicast Packets Displays the number of good Multicast packets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed CRC Align Errors Which displays the number of CRC and Align errors that have occurred on the interface since the device was last refreshed Undersize Packets Displays the number of undersized packets less than 64 octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Oversize Packets Displays the number of oversized packets over 1518 octets received on the interface since t
217. fier Not user A combination of the User set priority and 32768 MAC configurable the switch s MAC address except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts below a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC Priority A relative priority for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of areceived BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Port Priority A relative priority for each port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths STP calculates path costs and selects the path with the minimum cost as the active path 96 Default Value 32768 19 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports 4 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Spanning Tree C
218. fies the DSCP to queue map To return to the default map use the no form of this command Syntax qos map dscp queue dscp list to queue id no qos map dscp queue e dscp list Specify up to 8 DSCP values separate each DSCP with a space Range 0 63 queue id Enter the queue number to which the DSCP value corresponds QoS Commands qos trust Global Copyright 2004 Marvell CONFIDENTIAL Doc No MV S200005 00 Rev C January 19 2004 Preliminary Document Classification Proprietary Information Page 147 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration The following table describes the default map Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Queue settings for 3 11 19 cannot be modified Example The following example maps DSCP values 33 40 and 41 to queue 1 Console config qos map dscp queue 33 40 41 to 1 5 17 8 qos trust Global The qos trust global configuration command can be used in basic mode to configure the system to trust state To return to the default state use the no form of this command Syntax qos trust cos dscp tcp udp port no qos trust cos Classifies ingress packets with the packet CoS values For untagged packets the port default CoS is used dscp Classifies ingress packets with the packet DSCP values tcp udp port Classifies ingress packets with the packet destination port values Default Configuration
219. figured from a browser To disable this function use the no form of this command Syntax ip http server no ip http server Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enables the device to be configured from a browser Console enable ip http server 5 28 2 ip http port The ip http port global configuration command specifies the TCP port for use by a web browser to configure the device To use the default TCP port use the no form of this command Syntax ip http port port number no ip http port port number Port number for use by the HTTP server Range 0 65535 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration This default port number is 80 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command However specifying 0 as the port number will effectively disable HTTP access to the device Example The following example shows how the http port number is configured to 100 Console config ip http port 100 5 28 3 ip https server The ip https server global configuration command enables the device to be configured from a secured browser To disable this function use the no form of this command Syntax ip https server no ip https server
220. for SNTP use the no form of this command Syntax sntp authentication key number md5 value no sntp authentication key number number Key number Range 1 4294967295 value Key value Range Up to 8 characters Default Configuration No authentication key is defined Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example defines the authentication key for SNTP cnsole config sntp authentication key 8 md5 ClkKey console config sntp trusted key 8 console config sntp authenticate 5 5 6 sntp authenticate The sntp authenticate global configuration command grants authentication for received Network Time Protocol NTP traffic from servers To disable the feature use the no form of this command Syntax sntp authenticate no sntp authenticate This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration No authentication Command Mode Global Configuration mode 17 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines The command is relevant for both unicast and broadcast Examples The following example defines the authentication key for SNTP and grants authentication cnsole config sntp authentication key 8 md5 ClkKey console config sntp trusted key 8 console config sntp authenticate 5 5 7 sntp trusted key The sntp trusted key global configuration command a
221. framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but with either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error The total number of packets received less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and otherwise well formed The total number of packets received longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and otherwise well formed The total number of packets received less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error The total number of packets received longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The total number of packets including bad packets received that are 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that are between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets T
222. from List drop down menu The possible field range is 0 65535 Defines the TCP UDP destination port This field is active only if 800 6 TCP or 800 17 UDP is selected in the Select from List drop down menu The possible field range is 0 65535 Matches the source port IP address to which packets are addressed to the ACE Defines the source IP address wildcard mask Wildcard masks specify which bits are used and which bits are ignored Awild card mask of 255 255 255 255 indicates that no bit is important A wildcard of 0 0 0 0 indicates that all the bits are important For example if the source IP address 149 36 184 198 and the wildcard mask is 255 36 184 00 the first eight bits of the IP address are ignored while the last eight bits are used Matches the destination port IP address to which packets are addressed to the ACE Defines the destination IP address wildcard mask Matches the packet DSCP value to the ACE Either the DSCP value or the IP Precedence value is used to match packets to ACLs The possible field range is 0 63 Matches the packet IP Precedence value to the ACE Either the DSCP value or the IP Precedence value is used to match packets to ACLs The possible field range is 0 7 Use the Add to List button when you add the configured IP Based ACLs to the IP Based ACL Table at the bottom of the screen 59 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 6 2 IP Based ACL Configure Sample This section shows
223. g example displays the contents of the startup config file 18 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console show startup config software version 1 1 hostname device interface ethernet 1 1 ip address 176 242 100 100 255 255 255 0 duplex full speed 1000 interface ethernet 1 2 ip address 176 243 100 100 255 255 255 0 duplex full speed 1000 18 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 7 Ethernet Configuration Commands 5 7 1 interface ethernet The interface ethernet global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode to configure an Ethernet type interface Syntax interface ethernet interface interface Valid Ethernet port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enables ports g1 for configuration Console config interface ethernet g1 Console config if 5 7 2 interface range ethernet The interface range ethernet global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode to configure multiple Ethernet type interfaces Syntax interface range ethernet port range alls port range ist of valid ports to add Separate non consecutive ports with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of ports all All Ethernet ports Default
224. g mrouter learn pim dvmrp no ip igmp snooping mrouter learn pim dvmrp Default Configuration Automatic learning of mrouter ports is enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines Multicast router ports can be configured statically by the bridge multicast forward all command Example The following example enables automatic learning of multicast router ports on VLANs Console config interface vlan 2 Console config if ip igmp snooping mrouter learn pim dvmrp 5 9 4 ip igmp snooping host time out The ip igmp snooping host time out interface configuration command configures the host time out If an IGMP report for a multicast group was not received for a host time out period from a specific port this port is deleted from the member list of that multicast group To reset to default host time out use the no form of this command User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax ip igmp snooping host time out time out no ip igmp snooping host time out Default Configuration The default host time out is 260 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines The timeout should be at least greater than 2 query_interval max_response_time of the IGMP router Example The following example configures the host timeout to 300 seconds Console config interface vlan 2 Console config if ip igmp snooping host time out 300 5 9 5 ip igmp s
225. gaat nla ene eae 220 9 10 21p address ANCP irris nerian anaa pe dada daras 220 540 3p def ultgateWway iii tt iia 221 10 4 Show ip interfata tabis 222 A ANP a E E E E E E E dd ane se te cov ER E E E E A T 223 IN A O RN 223 AR A O NO 224 DANDO MP a A A i ee el Ae 224 5 11 LACP Command Sansinenea a a a E a thes bbdanbey a densci shes bndensen denon E EA 225 D1 131 acp system ProMty coito ta o 225 AMAT eed POMt PrOnity ss siz eect TE TETT E A E 226 529443 lacp Mi A r aa id aeo ley a ai a s 226 5 114 Show lacp ehe MeT a da 227 5115 Show lacp portechannel tenia ii deis ds 228 AS ON 229 DL MA tics 229 5 122 O eae 229 Deh 253 EES croia TE o A RAE E dais 230 D124 SHOWER aan 230 5 13 Management ACL Commands cccccionci nnincnicoi once 231 5 131 Managementacces lucia r i 231 519 2 permit Management isinsin ia ii a i aa aeea ioiii a 233 AI deny Management a 233 5 13 4 management access class v 40 veces neuen eee eee reee E aiii 234 5 13 5 show management access list cc0css02e seecce chee ad dada aran ao 235 5 13 6 show management AcCeSS ClaSS itiiti cia ie 236 5A14PHAY Diagnostics Commands ii A tdi 236 14 1 test copper port A ON 236 5 14 2 SHOW COPPer POrtS romina ciao 237 14 3 show copper ports cableilength isisi tidene a dis 238 5 14 4 show fiber ports OptiCal tranSCeiver oo eee eeeeeeee eset ee eeneeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeeseaaeeseeaeeeseeeeeeesnteeeneaas 238 5 15 Port Channel Commands 0 niet
226. gnated Port ID By which indicates that the Port ID number on the designated bridge that connects the link or the shared LAN to the root Designated Cost Indicates that the default path cost is assigned according to the method selected on the Spanning Tree Global Settings screen Forward Transitions This indicates the number of times the port has changed from the Forwarding state to Blocking state Remaining Hops Indicates the hops remaining to the next destination E MSTP Interface status table The page displays the current MST Interfaces configuration and status e PL ANET P VLAN 5 Spanning eet Cont Setup Config Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Tee Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut MSTP Interface Settings lt lt Previous 1 2 3 Next gt gt Port Port Path Designated Designated Designated Forward Remain Interface State TYPE Role priority Cost Bridge ID Port ID Cost Transitions Hops at MA A NA 128 2000000 NNN g2 N A NjA NA 128 2000000 N A N A NjA N A N A g3 NJA N A NA 128 2000000 N A N A NjA N A N A g4 N A NjA N A 128 2000000 N A N A N A N A N A gs N A N A NA 128 2000000 N A N A N A N A N A g N A NA NIA 128 2000000 N A N A N A N A N A g7 NA NIA N A 128 2000000 NA N A NJA NjA N A g8 NjA NJA N A 128 20000 N A NJA N A NA N A 99 NA ONJA N A 128 2000000 N A NJA N A NA N A gio NjA NIA N A 128 2000000 N A N A N A NjA N A gii N A N A NA 128 2000000 N A N A N A N A N A gl2 N A NjA NIA 128 2000000 N A N A N A N A N A
227. guration for this command Command Mode EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following command switches to another open Telnet session Console gt resume 176 213 10 50 5 23 5 reload The reload privileged EXEC command reloads the operating system Syntax reload Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines Caution should be exercised when resetting the device to ensure that no other activity is being performed In particular the user should verify that no configuration files are being downloaded at the time of reset Example The following example reloads the operating system Console reload User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 23 6 hostname The hostname global configuration command specifies or modifies the device host name To remove the existing host name use the no form of the command Syntax hostname name no hostname name The device host name Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example specifies the device host name Console config hostname abc 5 23 7 show users The show users user EXEC command displays information about the active users Syntax
228. he device was last refreshed Fragments Displays the number of fragments packets with less than 64 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Jabbers Displays the total number of received packets that were longer than 1518 octets This number excludes frame bits but includes FCS octets that had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral octet Alignment Error number The field range to detect jabbers is between 20 ms and 150 ms 4 5 3 RMON Alarm The RMON Alarm screen see figure 4 21 contains fields for setting network alarms Network alarms occur when a network problem or event is detected Rising and falling thresholds generate events Alarm Entry Source Interface rort vw OLaG 1 is Counter Name Total Bytes Octets Receive Y Sample Type Absolute iv Rising Threshold 100 Rising Event v Falling Threshold 20 Falling Event v Startup Alarm Rising Alarm v Interval 100 Owner Alarm Table Alarm Counter Counter Sample Rising Rising Falling Falling Startup Entry Name Interface Yalue Type Threshold Event Threshold Event Alarm Sener w Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 21 RMON Alarm screen User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The page contains the following fields Alarm Entry Source Interface Counter Name Sample Type Ris
229. he port is user defined e Dynamic indicates the port is configured dynamically e Forbidden forbidden ports are not included the Multicast group even if IGMP snooping designated the port to join a Multicast group e None displays the port is not configured for Multicast service User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 LAG Displays LAG that can be added to a Multicast service The fields are the same for both areas se the Add to List button when you want to assigns ports to a specific Multicast service address group E Multicast Table Config Config Multicast Bridge Multicast vianip Y Show All LAN MAC Static Forbidden Dynamic v lt gt Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 59 Bridge Multicast screen Example E Adding Bridge Multicast Addresses 1 2 3 4 5 Click the check box to enable the Bridge Multicast Filtering Define the VLAN ID and New Bridge Multicast Address fields Check a port to Static to join the port to the selected Multicast group Click Add to List button Click the Save Config to apply the sttings The bridge Multicast address is assigned to the Multicast group and the device is updated E Defining Ports to Receive Multicast Service 1 2 3 4 5 Define the VLAN ID and the Bridge Multicast Address fields Check and click a port to Static to join the port to the selected Multicast group Click Add to List button Click
230. he total number of packets including bad packets received that are between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that are between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that are between 512 and1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that are between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 19 2 rmon collection history The rmon collection history interface configuration command enables a Remote Monitoring RMON MIB history statistics group on an interface To remove a specified RMON history statistics group use the no form of this command Syntax rmon collection history index owner ownername buckets bucket number interval seconds no rmon collection history index Index The requested statistics index group Range 1 65535 owner ownername Records the RMON statistics group owner name If unspecified the name is an empty string buckets bucket number A value associated with the number of buckets specified for the RMON collection history group of statistics If unspecified defaults to 50 Range
231. hentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts A Notice to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentica
232. ibes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description Index An index that uniquely identifies the entry Interface The sampled Ethernet interface Interval The interval in seconds between samples Requested Samples The requested number of samples to be saved Granted Samples The granted number of samples to be saved Owner The entity that configured this entry 5 19 4 show rmon history The show rmon history user EXEC command displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history Syntax show rmon history index throughput errors other period seconds index The requested set of samples Range 1 65535 throughput Displays throughput counters errors Displays error counters other Displays drop and collision counters User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 period seconds Specifies the requested period time to display Range 1 4294967295 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history for throughput on index number 5 Console show rmon history 5 throughput Sample Set 1 Owner CLI Interface g1 Interval 1800 Requested samples 50 Granted samples 50 Maximum table size 500 Time Octets Packets Jan 18 2002 21 57 00 303595962 357568 Jan 18 2002 21 57 30 287696304 275686 Broa
233. ics are refreshed The possible field values are e No Refresh indicates that the EAP statistics are not refreshed e 15 Sec which indicates that the EAP statistics are refreshed every 15 seconds e 30 Sec which indicates that the EAP statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds e 60 Sec which indicates that the EAP statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds Name Displays the measured 802 1x statistic Description Describes the measured 802 1x statistic Packet Displays the amount of packets measured for the particular 802 1x statistic 4 5 7 GVRP Statistics The GVRP Statistics screen see figure 4 26 contains device statistics for GVRP The GVRP Statistics screen is divided into two areas GVRP Statistics Table and GVRP Error Statistics Table Q PLANET Kewoties b Coommanicaton Setup Config Config Statistics ACL GVRP Statistics Interface O pot gl M Ola 1 Refresh Rate No Refresh Y GYRP Statistics Table Attribute Received Transmitted Join Empty Empty Leave Empty Join In Leave In Leave All GVRP Error Statistics Invalid Protocol ID Invalid Attribute Type Invalid Attribute Yalue Invalid Attribute Length Invalid Event Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 26 GVRP Statistics screen 54 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The following fields are relevant for both tables Interface Refresh Rate Specifies the interface type for which the statistics are displayed e P
234. id VLAN ID value Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The example displays IGMP snooping information Console show ip igmp snooping interface 1 IGMP Snooping is globaly disabled User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 IGMP Snooping is disabled on VLAN 1 IGMP host timeout is 260 sec IGMP Immediate leave is disabled IGMP leave timeout is 60 sec IGMP mrouter timeout is 300 sec Automatic learning of multicast router ports is enabled 5 9 9 show ip igmp snooping groups The show ip igmp snooping groups user EXEC command displays the multicast groups learned by IGMP snooping Syntax show ip igmp snooping groups vlan vian id address p multicast address vlan_id VLAN ID value p multicast address P multicast address Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines To see the full multicast address table including static addresses use the show bridge address table command Example The example shows IGMP snooping information Console show ip igmp snooping groups Vian IP Address Querier 1 224 239 130 2 2 3 Yes 19 224 239 130 2 2 8 Yes User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 10 IP Addressing Commands 5 10 1 ip address The ip address i
235. id Events statistics The Clear All Counters button resets all tables 55 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 56 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 6 ACL An ACL consists of a set of rules which are matched sequentially against a packet When a packet meets the match criteria of a rule the specified rule action Permit Deny is taken and the additional rules are not checked for a match On this menu the interfaces to which an ACL applies must be specified as well as whether it applies to inbound or outbound traffic Rules for the ACL are specified created using the ACL Rule Configuration menu 4 6 1 IP Based ACL The IP Based ACL Access Control List screen see figure 4 27 contains information for defining IP Based ACLs Q PL NET Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut IP based ACL 4 O ACL Name New ACL Name Delete ACL Action Deny Protocol Select from List Any y O Protocol ID To Match TCP Flags Urg Ack Psh Rst Syn Fin Source Port O O any Destination Port O O Any Source IP Address 0 0 0 0 gt Wild Card Mask 0 0 0 0 d Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 Wild Card mask 0 0 0 0 Match DSCP 10 Match IP Precedence Update Action Protocol Source Destination Source Destination Match Match Port Port IP Address IP DSCP IP Address Precedence Deny Any 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 27 IP Base ACL screen 57 The Page con
236. iguration Interactive timeout 10 minutes 10 seconds History 10 5 13 Management ACL Commands 5 13 1 management access list The management access list configuration command defines an access list for management and enters the access list for User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 configuration Once in the access list configuration mode the denied or permitted access conditions are configured with the deny and permit commands To remove an access list use the no form of this command Syntax management access list name no management access list name name The access list name using up to 32 characters Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command enters the access list configuration mode where the denied or permitted access conditions with the deny and permit commands must be defined If no match criteria are defined the default is deny If reentering to an access list context the new rules are entered at the end of the access list Use the management access class command to select the active access list The active management list cannot be updated or removed Examples The following example shows how to create an access list called mlist configure two management interfaces ethernet g1 and ethernet g9 and make the access list the active list Console config management access list mlist
237. iguration to the Startup Configuration Use the copy running config startup config command to copy the running configuration to the startup configuration Backup the Running Configuration or Startup Configuration to the Backup Configuration Use the copy running config file command to backup the running configuration to a backup configuration file Use the copy startup config file command to backup the startup configuration a backup configuration file Specifying out of band addresses If you want to copy from to a server on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ipaddress User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Example The following example copies a system image named file1 from the TFTP server with an IP address of 172 16 101 101 to non active image file Console copy tftp 172 16 101 101 file1 image Accessing file file1 on 172 16 101 101 Loading file1 from 172 16 101 101 Copy took 0 01 11 hh mm ss Accessing file configfile on 00b 172 16 1 1 Loading file1 from oob 172 16 1 1 Copy took 0 0 23 hh mm ss 5 6 2 show startup config The show startup config privileged EXEC command displays the startup configuration file contents Syntax show startup config Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The followin
238. igure Console config 5 26 4 login The login user EXEC command changes a login username Syntax login Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to enter privileged EXEC mode and login Console gt login User Name admin Password Console 5 26 5 exit configuration The exit command exits any configuration mode to the next highest mode in the CLI mode hierarchy Syntax exit Default Configuration This command has no default configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode All command modes User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example changes the configuration mode from Interface Configuration mode to User EXEC mode Console config if exit Console config exit Console 5 26 6 exit EXEC The exit user EXEC command closes an active terminal session by logging off the device Syntax exit Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC command mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example closes an active terminal session Console gt exit 5 26 7 end The end global configuration c
239. indicates the port is user defined Dynamic indicates the port is configured dynamically Forbidden forbidden ports are not included the Multicast group even if IGMP snooping designated the port to join a Multicast group None displays the port is not configured for Multicast service Displays LAG that can be added to a Multicast service 4 11 SNMP User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP provides a method for managing network devices Devices supporting SNMP run a local software agent The SNMP agents maintain a list of variables which are used to manage the device The variables are defined in the Management Information Base MIB The MIB contains the variables controlled by the agent The SNMP protocol defines the MIB specification format as well as the format used to access the information over the network Access rights to the SNMP agents are controlled by access strings To communicate with the device the Embedded Web Server submits a valid community string for authentication 4 11 1 Global Parameters The Global Parameters screen see figure 4 61 contains parameters for defining SNMP notification parameters Notifications Local Engine ID Use Default SNMP Notifications v Authentication Notifications v Global Parameters EngineID not Configured Cancel Config Figure 4 61 SNMP Global Parameter The Global
240. ined MAC based ACLs New ACL Name Specifies a new user defined MAC based ACL name Delete ACL By which deletes the selected ACL Action Indicates the ACL forwarding action Possible field values are e Permit by which forwards packets which meet the ACL criteria e Deny drops packets which meet the ACL criteria e Shutdown where drops packet that meet the ACL criteria and disables the port to which the packet was addressed Source MAC Address Matches the source MAC address to which packets are addressed to the ACE Wildcard Mask Defines the source IP address wildcard mask Wildcard masks specify which bits are used and ignored Awild card mask of 255 255 255 255 indicates that no bit is important A wildcard of 0 0 0 0 indicates that all the bits are important For example if the source IP address 149 36 184 198 and the wildcard mask is 255 36 184 00 the first eight bits of the IP address are ignored while the last eight bits are used Dest MAC Address Where matches the destination MAC address to which packets are addressed to the ACE Wildcard Mask which defines the destination IP address wildcard mask VLAN ID Which matches the packet s VLAN ID to the ACE The possible field values are 2 to 4094 Ether Type Where specifies the packet s Ethernet type Use the Add to List button to add the configured MAC Based ACLs to the MAC Based ACL Table at the bottom of the screen 64 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW
241. ing Threshold Rising Event Falling Threshold Falling Event Startup Alarm Interval Owner Indicates a specific alarm Displays the interface for which RMON statistics are displayed The possible field values are e Port displays the selected port of the RMON statistics e LAG displays the RMON statistics for the selected LAG Displays the selected MIB variable Defines the sampling method for the selected variable and comparing the value against the thresholds The possible field values are e Absolute compares the values directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval e Delta subtracts the last sampled value from the current value The difference in the values is compared to the threshold Displays the rising counter value that triggers the rising threshold alarm The rising threshold is presented on top of the graph bars Each monitored variable is designated a color Displays the mechanism in which the alarms are reported The possible field values are e LOG Indicates there is not a saving mechanism for either the device or in the management system If the device is not reset the entry remains in the Log Table e TRAP indicates that an SNMP trap is generated and sent via the Trap mechanism The Trap can also be saved using the Trap mechanism e Both indicates that both the Log and Trap mechanism are used to report alarms Displays the falling counter value that triggers the falling threshold al
242. ing function that may introduce this kind of problem Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the Ethernet Switch If the Ethernet Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor 100Base TX port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution Check the LNK ACT LED on the switch Try another port on the Switch Make sure the cable is installed properly Make sure the cable is the right type Turn off the power After a while turn on power again How to deal forgotten password situation of Switch Solution 1 Please contact Planet switch support team and the mail address is support_switch planet com itw User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 APPENDEX A A 1 Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments m 1
243. ing to the device are tagged by the ports PVID PLANT E VLAN E Config Admi Acceptable Frame Type Ingress ly Filtering LAG gl Access g2 Access g3 Access g4 Access g5 Access a6 Access 97 Access _ g Access 99 Access glo Access gil Access MEENE ENEE ENEE gl2 Access Figure 4 15 VLAN Port Setting screen The page contains the following fields Port Mode Acceptable Frame Type PVID Ingress Filtering LAG Displays the port number included in the VLAN Indicates the port mode Possible values are e General The port belongs to VLANs and each VLAN is user defined as tagged or untagged full 802 1Q mode e Access The port belongs to a single untagged VLAN When a port is in Access mode the packet types which are accepted on the port packet type cannot be designated It is also not possible to enable disable ingress filtering on an access port e Trunk The port belongs to VLANs in which all ports are tagged except for an optional single native VLAN Packet type accepted on the port Possible values are e Admit Tag Only indicates that only tagged packets are accepted on the port e Admit All indicates that both tagged and untagged packets are accepted on the port Assigns a VLAN ID to untagged packets The possible values are 2 to 4094 VLAN 4095 is defined as per standard and industry practice as the discard VLAN Packets classified to the Discard VLAN are dropped
244. ion dot1x The aaa authentication dot1x global configuration command specifies one or more authentication authorization and accounting AAA methods for use on interfaces running IEEE 802 1X Use the no form of this command to return to default Syntax aaa authentication dot1x default method methoa2 no aaa authentication dot1x default method method2 At least one from the following table Keyword Description Radius Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication None Uses no authentication Default Configuration The default behavior of the aaa authenctication for dot1 x is failed to authenticate If the 8021 x calls the AAA for authentication services it will receive a fail status Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error not if it fails To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error specify none as the final method in the command line Examples User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The following example uses the aaa authentication dot1x default command with no authentication Console config aaa authentication dot1x default none 5 29 2 dot1x system auth control The dot1x system auto control command enables 802 1x globally Use the no form of this command to disable 802 1x globally dot1x system auto control no dot1x syst
245. is incomplete and the character is entered in place of a parameter The matched parameters for this command are displayed To assist in using the CLI there is an assortment of editing features The following features are described Terminal Command Buffer Command Completion Keyboard Shortcuts Every time a command is entered in the CLI it is recorded on an internally managed Command History buffer Commands are stored in the buffer which is maintained on a First In First Out FIFO basis These commands can be recalled reviewed modified and reissued This buffer is not preserved across device resets User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Keyword Source or destination Up arrow key Recalls commands in the history buffer beginning with the most recent command Ctrl P Repeats the key sequence to recall successively older commands Down arrow Returns to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with key the up arrow key Repeating the key sequence will recall successively more recent commands By default the history buffer system is enabled but it can be disabled at any time For information about the command syntax to enable or disable the history buffer see history There is a standard default number of commands that are stored in the buffer The standard number of 10 commands can be increased to 256 By configuring 0 the effect is the same as disabling the histo
246. itch 1 Use Internet Explorer 5 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP Address as following http 192 168 1 254 2 When the following login screen appears the system will ask you to enter the username and password Default User name admin Default Password admin The login screen in Figure 4 2 appears Notice The following section will base on the screens of WGSW 24020 for WGSW 24020 the display will be the same to WGSW 48040 27 3 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 A Log In Microsoft Internet Explorer Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q ex Q E O JO search Sie Favorites 2 E Ex Fel Address a http 192 168 1 254 config authentication_page htm v Go SY WGSW 24020 Input username and password then click Submit Username Password Internet Figure 4 2 Switch Web Login screen After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 3 rt See o Device Information System Name IP Address 192 168 1 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DNS Servers Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Address Mode Static Base MAC Address 00 30 4F 24 02 01 System Information Serial Number Model Name WGSW 24020 Hardware Version 00 03 00 Boot Version 1 0 2 Firmware Version 1 0 0 34 System Location v Cancel Config Custam Fantart
247. ity frame from the client before resending the request Range 1 65535 seconds Default Configuration 30 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet Examples The following command sets the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an EAP request identity frame to 3600 seconds Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if dot1x timeout tx period 3600 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 29 9 dotl1x max req The dot1x max req interface configuration command sets the maximum number of times that the switch sends an Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP request identity frame assuming that no response is received to the client before restarting the authentication process Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x max req count no dot1x max req count Number of times that the switch sends an EAP request identity frame before restarting the authentication process Range 1 10 Default Configuartion 2 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets the number of times that the switch sends an EAP request identity frame to 6 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if dot1x max req 6 5 29 10 dot1x timeout supp timeout The dot1x timeout supp timeout interface
248. iv 14 4 30 30 w 46 46 62 62 15 15 31 31 vw 47 47 Y 63 63 v Figure 4 43 Out of Profile DSCP Assignments screen The page contains the following fields DSCP In This displays the DSCP In value The value is form 0 63 DSCP Out This displays the current DSCP out value A new value can be selected from the pull down menu The Policy Settings button opens the Policy Name screen see figure 4 44 Policy Name ON Policy Name Figure 4 44 Policy Settings screen 89 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The page contains the following fields Defines a new Policy name Policy Name Add to List This button will add the policy to the Policy Name table Select Policy This selects an existing Policy by name New Policy Name Which defines a new Policy name Class Map Where selects an existing Class Map by name 90 m Class Map setting User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 New Class Map by which the New Class Map button opens the New Class Map screen see figure 4 45 Add Class Map Class Map Name Preferred ACL IP Based v IP ACL Match Or v MAC ACL Add to List Class Map Preferred IP ACL Match MAC ACL Name ACL Cancel Figure 4 45 Class Map Settings screen The page contains the following fields Class Map Name Preferred ACL IP ACL Match MAC ACL defines a new Class Map name which indicates if packets are first matched to an IP based
249. ivilege level Privilege level to enter the system Range 1 15 Default Configuration The default privilege level is 15 Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to enter privileged mode Console gt enable enter password Console User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 26 2 disable The disable privileged EXEC command returns to User EXEC mode Syntax disable privilege level privilege level Privilege level to enter the system Range 1 15 Default Configuration The default privilege level is 1 Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to return to normal mode Console disable Console gt 5 26 3 configure The configure privileged EXEC command enters the global configuration mode Syntax configure There are no parameters for this command Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In the following example because no keyword is entered a prompt is displayed After the keyword is selected a message confirming the command entry method is displayed User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console conf
250. jA N A LAG8 Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 N A N A NjA NjA Y Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 50 STP Port status screen User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 9 4 RSTP Port settings While the classic spanning tree prevents Layer 2 forwarding loops in a general network topology convergence can take between 30 60 seconds This time may delay detecting possible loops and propagating status topology changes Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP detects and uses network topologies that allow a faster STP convergence without creating forwarding loops refer to figure 4 51 PLANET a Port rt VLAN A Spanning A e ae Retener 4 Conmancaton Setup Config Config Statistics ACL Security Qos Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut RSTP Port Settings f Interface Port gt KJ LAG Role Designated Mode STP Fast Link Disable Port State Disabled Point to Point Admin Status Auto v Point to Point Oper Status Enable Activate Protocol Migration Test E Update lt lt Previous 1 2 3 Next gt gt Fast Link Port Point to Point Point to Point Interface Role Mode Oper Status Status Admin Status Operational Status gd Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable e g2 Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 3 g Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 4 g4 Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 5 as Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 6 g Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 7 g7 Designat
251. lege levels To return to the default configuration use the no form of this command Syntax aaa authentication enable default ist name method1 method2 no aaa authentication enable default default Uses the listed authentication methods that follow this argument as the default list of methods when using higher privilege levels listname Character string used to name the list of authentication methods activated when using accesshigher privilege levels method method2 Specify at least one from the following table Keyword Source or destination Enable Uses the enable password for authentication Line Uses the line password for authentication None Uses no authentication Radius Uses the list of all radius servers for authentication Uses username enabx Where x is the privilege level Tacacs Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication Uses username enabx Where x is the privilege level User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration If the default list is not set only the enable password is checked This has the same effect as the command aaa authentication enable default enable On the console the enable password is used if it exists If no password is set the process still succeeds This has the same effect as using the command aaa authentication enable default enable none Command Mode Global Configuration mo
252. les The following example enables anycast clients Console config if sntp anycast client enable 5 5 11 sntp client enable interface The sntp client enable interface configuration command enables the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP client on an interface To disable the SNTP client use the no form of this command Syntax sntp client enable no sntp client enable This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Disabled 17 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet Port Channel VLAN mode User Guidelines Use the sntp client enable global configuration command to enable broadcast clients globally Use the sntp anycast client enable global configuration command to enable anycast clients globally Examples The following example enables the SNTP client on the interface console config sntp client enable 5 5 12 sntp unicast client enable The sntp unicast client enable global configuration command enables the device to use the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP to request and accept Network Time Protocol NTP traffic from servers To disable requesting and accepting Network Time Protocol NTP traffic from servers use the no form of this command Syntax sntp unicast client enable no sntp unicast client enable This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Disabled Command Mode
253. line The line global configuration command identifies a specific line for configuration and enters the line configuration command mode Syntax line console telnet ssh console Console terminal line telnet Virtual terminal for remote console access Telnet ssh Virtual terminal for secured remote console access SSH Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example configures the device as a virtual terminal for remote console access Console config line telnet Console config line 5 12 2 speed The speed line configuration command sets the line baud rate Syntax speed bps bps Baud rate in bits per second bps The options are 2400 9600 19200 and 38400 Default Configuration This default speed is 115200 Command Mode Line Configuration console mode User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command which is available only on the console line Examples The following example the baud rate is set to 19200 Console config line console Console config line speed 19200 5 12 3 exec timeout The exec timeout line configuration command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected To restore the default s
254. lines port Port number for syslog messages If unspecified the port number defaults to 514 Range 1 65535 severity leve Limits the logging of messages to the syslog servers to a specified level emergencies alerts critical errors warnings notifications informational and debugging If unspecified the default level is informational facility The facility that is indicated in the message Can be one of the following values local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local 6 local7 If unspecified the port number defaults to local7 text Syslog server description which can be up to 64 characters User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration As described in the field descriptions Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Multiple syslog servers can be used If no specific severity level is specified the global values apply to each server To define a logging server on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Example The following example configures messages with a critical severity level so that they are logged to a syslog server with an IP address 10 1 1 1 Console config logging 10 1 1 1 severity critical 5 24 3 logging console The logging console global configuration command limits messages logged to the console based on severity To disable logging to the console terminal use the no
255. lines If multicast routers exist on the VLAN and IGMP snooping is not enabled the bridge multicast forward all command should be used to enable forwarding all multicast packets to the multicast routers Example In this example bridge multicast filtering is enabled console config bridge multicast filtering 5 4 3 bridge multicast address The bridge multicast address interface configuration command registers MAC layer multicast addresses to the bridge table and adds static ports to the group To unregister the MAC address use the no form of the bridge multicast address command Syntax bridge multicast address mac multicast address ip multicast address bridge multicast address mac multicast address ip multicast address add remove ethernet interface list port channel port channel number list no bridge multicast address mac multicast address ijp multicast address add Adds ports to the group If no option is specified this is the default option remove Removes ports from the group mac multicast address MAC multicast address jp multicast address P multicast address interface list Separate nonconsecutive Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of ports port channel number list Separate nonconsecutive port channels with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of ports Default Configuration
256. lines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the authentication configuration console show authentication methods Login Authentication Method Lists Default Radius Local Line Console_Login Line None Enable Authentication Method Lists Default Radius Enable Console_Enable Enable None Line Login Method List Enable Method List Console Console_Login Console_Enable Telnet Default Default SSH Default Default HTTP Radius local HTTPS Radius local 802 1x Radius 15 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 3 8 password The password line configuration command specifies a password on a line To remove the password use the no form of this command Syntax password password encrypted no password password Password for this level from 1 to 159 characters in length encrypted Encrypted password to be entered copied from another device configuration Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example specifies a password abc on a line console config line password abc 5 3 9 enable password The enable password global configuration command sets a local password to control access to normal and privilege levels To remove the password requirement use the no f
257. llo Time indicates the amount of time in seconds a root bridge waits between configuration messages The default is 2 seconds The range is 1 to 10 seconds Root Forward delay This indicates the device forward delay time The Forward Delay Time indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge remains in a listening and learning state before sec forwarding packets The default is 15 seconds The range is 4 to 30 seconds Topology Changes This indicates the total amount of STP state changes that have occurred Counts Last Topology Change Which indicates the amount of time that has elapsed since the bridge was initialized or reset and the last topographic change occurred The time is displayed in a day hour minute second format for example 2 days 5 hours 10 minutes and 4 seconds 4 9 2 The Global STP The Global STP screen see figure 4 48 contains parameters for enabling STP on the device Global Setting Spanning Tree State which indicates if STP is enabled on the device _ m R S PLANET Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics cs ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin O Global STP Global Setting Spanning Tree State Disable v STP Operation Mode Classic STP M BPDU Handling Flooding Y Path Cost Default Values Long Wipe Settings Priority 32768 Hello Time 2 Sec O Mar Age Sec O Forward Delay Sec v Cancel Config Figure 4 48 Global STP screen
258. m It provides 4 priority queues per port for different types of traffic allowing administrators to set policies for classified filtering and rule based rate limitation The WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 prioritizes applications with WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing scheduling algorithm to allocate more bandwidth to key traffics such as voice transmission empowering the enterprise to take full advantages of the limited network resources and guarantee the best performance PLANET WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 offers comprehensive Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge Its protection mechanisms comprised of port based 802 1x user and device authentication The administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with time and effort considerably less then before With its built in web based management the PLANET WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 offers an easy to use platform independent management and configuration facility The PLANET WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 support standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and can be managed via any standard based management software For text based management the WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 can also be accessed via Telnet and the console interfaces For secure remote management the WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 supports SSL and SSH connection which encrypt the packet content at each session 2 1 2 Switch Front Panel Figure 2 1 shows the front panel of the Switch
259. m and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used The unique switch identifier The path cost to the root associated with each switch port The por tidentifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information o The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch o The path cost to the root from the transmitting port o The port identifier of the transmitting port The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the pa
260. malized weight This actually sets the bandwidth allocation of each queue A weight of O means no bandwidth is allocated for the same queue and the share bandwidth is divided among the remaining queues All eight queues are participating excluding the queues that are assigned as expedite queues The weights of these queues are ignored in the ratio calculation All eight queues participate in the WRR exclude the expedite queues in which case the corresponded weight is ignored not used in the ratio calculation The expedite queue is a priority queue and it is serviced until empty before the other queues are serviced Use the priority queue out num of queues command to globally configure a queue as WRR or Strict Priority Use this command to set a weight per interface Example The following example sets queue weights as follows Queue 1 6 36 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Queue 2 6 36 Queue 3 6 36 Queue 4 6 36 Queue 5 6 36 Queue 6 6 36 Queue 7 6 36 Queue 8 6 36 Console config if f wrr queue bandwidth 6 6666666 5 17 5 priority queue out num of queues The priority queue out num of queues global configuration command enables the egress queues to be expedite queues Use the no form of this command to return to the default values Syntax priority queue out num of queues number of queues no priority queue out num of queues number of queues Assign the
261. mand Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the system information console show system System Description System Up Time days hour min sec 01 02 48 20 System Contact System Name System Location System MAC Address 00 03 6d 30 57 00 System Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 89 1 1 Temperature Indicates the temperature at which the device is currently running The device temperature is displayed in Celsius The device temperature threshold is 0 40 C 32 104F The following table displays the temperature in Fahrenheit in increments of 5 Celsius Fahrenheit 0 32 5 41 10 50 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 15 59 20 68 25 77 30 86 35 95 40 104 5 23 10 show version The show version user EXEC command displays the system version information Syntax show version Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays a system version this version number is only for demonstration purposes Console gt show version SW version x x x xx date xx xxx xxxx time 17 34 19 Boot version x x x xx date xx xxx xxxx time 11 48 21 HW version x x x 5 24 Syslog Commands 5 24 1 logging on The logging on global configuration command controls err
262. mand mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the current privilege level Console show privilege User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Current privilege level is 15 5 27 VLAN Commands 5 27 1 vlan database The vlan database global configuration command enters the VLAN configuration mode Syntax vlan database Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enters the VLAN database mode Console config vlan database Console config vlan 5 27 2 vlan Use the vlan interface configuration VLAN command to create a VLAN To delete a VLAN use the no form of this command Syntax vlan vlan range no vlan vian range vian range A list of valid VLAN IDs to be added List separate non consecutive VLAN IDs separated by commas without spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Range 2 4063 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode VLAN Database mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example VLAN number 1972 is created Console config vlan database Console config vlan
263. mmand Modes Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays spanning tree information Console show spanning tree Spanning tree enabled mode RSTP Default port cost method short Root ID Priority 32768 Address 0001 4297 e000 Cost 57 Port g 1 Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec Bridge ID Priority 32768 Address 0002 4b29 7a00 Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec Number of topology changes 2 last change occurred 2d18h ago Times hold 1 topology change 35 notification 2 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 hello 2 max age 20 forward delay 15 Interface Port ID Cost Set Designated Port ID Name Prio Nbr Cost Bridge ID Prio Nbr g1 128 1 19 FWD 38 32768 0030 9441 62c1 128 25 g2 128 2 19 FWD 57 32769 0002 4b29 7a00 128 25 ch1 128 65 19 FWD 57 32769 0002 4b29 7a00 128 65 The following example displays spanning tree information for port g1 Console show spanning tree ethernet g1 Interface Port ID Cost Set Designated Port ID Name Prio Nbr Cost Bridge ID Prio Nbr g1 128 1 19 FWD 38 32768 0030 9441 62c1 128 25 Spanning tree enabled Type point to point configured auto Port Fast no configured no Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU sent 2 received 120638 5 22 SSH and SLOGIN Commands 5 22 1 ip ssh port The ip ssh port global config
264. mmand displays the RADIUS server settings Syntax show radius servers Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays the RADIUS server settings Console show radius servers Port IP address Auth Acct TimeOut Retransmit Deadtime Source IP Priority Global values TimeOut 3 Retransmit 3 Deadtime 0 Source IP 172 16 8 1 172 16 1 1 1645 1646 Global Global Global Global 1 172 16 1 2 1645 1646 11 8 Global Global 2 OOB RADIUS servers Port IP address Auth Acct TimeOut Retransmit Deadtime Source IP Priority 176 16 8 9 1645 1646 Global Global Global Global 1 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 19 RMON Commands 5 19 1 show rmon statistics The show rmon statistics user EXEC command displays RMON Ethernet Statistics Syntax show rmon statistics ethernet interface number port channel port channel number interface number Valid Ethernet port port channel number Valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics for port g1 Console show rmon statistics ethernet g1 Port g1 Dropped 8 Octets 878128 Packets 978
265. mple The following example displays all VLAN information Console show vian internal usage VLAN Usage IP Address 1007 g1 Active 1008 g2 Inactive 1009 e3 Active Reserved No Yes Yes 5 27 21 show interfaces switchport The show interfaces switchport privileged EXEC command displays switchport configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax show interfaces switchport ethernet interface port channel port channel numben interface Specific interface such as ethernet e8 port channel number Valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays switchport configuration individually for e1 Console gt show interface switchport ethernet e1 Port e1 Port mode General GVRP Status disabled Ingress Filtering true Acceptable Frame Type admitAll Ingress Untagged VLAN NATIVE 1 Port is member in Vlan Name Egress rule Type 1 default untagged System 8 VLANO08 tagged Dynamic 11 VLANO11 tagged Static Forbidden VLANS VLAN Name 73 Out 74 Classification rules Group ID VLAN User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 219 372 5 28 Web Server Commands 5 28 1 ip http server The ip http server global configuration command enables the device to be con
266. mplete we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at whose own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures WEEE Warning To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately Revision PLANET 24 48 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 2 4 Shared SFP Managed Ethernet Switch User s Manual FOR MODELS WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 REVISION 1 0 MAY
267. n mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the following alarm conditions Alarm index 1000 Variable identifier abc Sample interval 360000 seconds Rising threshold 1000000 Falling threshold 1000000 Rising threshold event index 10 Falling threshold event index 20 Console config rmon alarm 1000 abc 360000 1000000 1000000 10 20 5 19 6 show rmon alarm table The show rmon alarm table user EXEC command displays the alarms summary table Syntax show rmon alarm table Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the alarms summary table User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console show rmon alarm table Index OID Owner 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 1 CLI 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 1 Manager 3 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 9 CLI The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description Index An index that uniquely identifies the entry OID Monitored variable OID Owner The entity that configured this entry 5 19 7 show rmon alarm The show rmon alarm user EXEC command displays alarm configuration Syntax show rmon alarm number number Alarm index Range 1 65535 Default Configu
268. n the device Example The following example configures user bob with the password lee and user level 15 to the system console config username bob password lee level 15 15 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 3 11 show users accounts The show users accounts privileged EXEC command displays information about the local user database Syntax show users accounts Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the local users configured with access to the system console config show users accounts Username Privilege Bob 15 Robert 15 5 4 Address Table Commands 5 4 1 bridge address The bridge address VLAN interface configuration command adds a static MAC layer station source address to the bridge table To delete the MAC address use the no form of the bridge address command using the no form of the command without 15 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 specifying a MAC address deletes all static MAC addresses belonging to this VLAN Syntax bridge address mac address ethernet interface port channel port channel number permanent delete onreset delete on timeout secure no bridge address mac address mac address A valid MAC address Interface A valid Ethernet port port channel
269. name DHCP host name This name need not be the same as the host name entered in global configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 mode Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet VLAN port channel out of band Ethernet User Guidelines The ip address dhcp command allows any interface to dynamically learn its IP address by using the DHCP protocol Some DHCP Servers require that the DHCPDISCOVER message have a specific host name The most typical usage of the ip address dhcp hostname host name command is when host name is the host name provided by the system administrator If a router is configured to obtain its IP address from a DHCP server it sends a DHCPDISCOVER message to provide information about itself to the DHCP server on the network If the ip address dhcp command is used with or without the optional keyword the DHCP option 12 field host name option is included in the DISCOVER message By default the specified DHCP host name is the device globally configured host name When the device is reset the DHCP command is saved in the configuration file but the IP address is not It is recommended not to define a DHCP address on an inband port or LAG If a DHCP IP address is configured this address is dynamically retrieved and the ip address dhcp command is saved in the configuration file In the event of a master failure the backup will again att
270. name and passwords e 802 1X indicates that the RADIUS server is used for 802 1X authentication e All where indicates that the RADIUS server is used for authenticating user name and passwords and 802 1X port authentication Use the Add to List button when you add the RADIUS configuration to the RADIUS Table at the bottom of the screen 71 4 7 3 TACACS User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The device provides Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS client support TACACS provides centralized security for validation of users accessing the device TACACS provides a centralized user management system while still retaining consistency with RADIUS and other authentication processes The TACACS protocol ensures network integrity through encrypted protocol exchanges between the device and TACACS server You can refer to figure 4 31 Parameters Host IP Address Priority 10 Source IP Address 0 0 0 0 Key String i Authentication Port 49 Timeout for Reply i Status Single Connection Table Host Priority Source Authentica Timeout Single Status IP Address IP Address tion Port for Reply Connection TACACS Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 31 TACACS screen The Page contains the following fields Host IP Address Priority Source IP Address Key String Authentication Port The Timeout for Reply Status Single Connection Indicates the TACACS Server IP
271. ndicate that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Lights to indicate the port is running in 1000Mbps speed 1000 Orange Off indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps or 100Mbps 2 1 3 2 WGSW 48040 LED Indications m System LED Color Function PWR Green Lights to indicate that the Switch has power m Per 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 port Color Function Lights to indicate the port is running in 1000Mbps speed Orange LNK ACT Blink indicate that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Dual Color Lights indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps or 100Mbps Blink indicate that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port m Per SFP interfaces Shared with 10 100 1000Base T Port 23 Port 24 Port 47 and Port 48 LED Color Function Lights to indicate the link through that port is successfully established LNK ACT Orange Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port 2 1 4 Switch Rear Panel Figure 2 3 and 2 4 shows the rear panel of the Switch SZ SZ o eo So Figure 2 3 WGSW 24020 rear panel 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 100 240V AC 50 60Hz Figure 2 4 WGSW 48040 rear panel Power Notice 1 The device is a power required device it means it will not work till it is powered If your networks should active all the time please consider u
272. nfigures an external time source for the system clock Syntax clock source sntp no clock source sntp SNTP servers Default Configuration No external clock source Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example configures an external time source for the system clock console clock source sntp 5 5 3 clock timezone The clock timezone global configuration command sets the time zone for display purposes To set the time to Coordinated Universal Time UTC use the no form of this command 17 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax clock timezone hours offset minutes minutes offsef zone acronym no clock timezone hours offse t Hours difference from UTC Range 12 13 minutes minutes offse t Minutes difference from UTC Range 0 59 zone acronym The acronym of the time zone Range Up to 4 characters Default Configuration UTC Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The system internally keeps time in UTC so this command is used only for display purposes and when the time is manually set Examples The following example sets the timezone to 6 hours difference from UTC console config clock timezone 6 zone CST 5 5 4 clock summer time The clock summer time global configuration command configures the system to automatically s
273. ng Tree Master instance The IST Master is the specified instance root 4 9 6 MSTP Instance Settings MSTP opreation maps VLANs into STP instances see figure 4 53 Packets assigned to various VLANs are transmitted along different paths within Multiple Spanning Trees Regions MST Regions Regions are one or more Multiple Spanning Tree bridges by which frames can be transmitted In configuring MST the MST region to which the device belongs is defined A configuration consists of the name revision and region to which the device belongs Network Administrators can define MSTP Instances settings using the MSTP Instance Settings screen MSTP Instance Settings Instance Configuration VLAN Instance Configuration Instance ID 14 Included VLANs Included LAN v Stans Settings Bridge Priority 32768 Designated Root Bridge ID 32768 00 03 6d 30 57 00 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Bridge ID 32768 00 03 6d 30 57 00 Remaining Hops 20 Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 53 MSTP Instance Settings screen User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The page contains the following fields m Instance Configuration Press the VLAN Instance Configuration button a new window popup Assgin selected VLAN to specify MST Instance at the VLAN Instatnce Configuration page The screen in Figure 4 54 appears Instance ID 0 7 LAN VLAN 1 VLAN 2 VLAN 3 VLAN 4 VLAN S VLAN 6 VLAN 7 VLAN 8 VLAN 9 VLAN 10 VLAN 11 VLAN 12
274. nge of ports port channel number list Separate non consecutive valid port channels with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of port channels Default Configuration No forbidden addresses are defined Command Modes Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines Before defining forbidden ports the multicast group should be registered 16 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Examples In this example the MAC address 0100 5e02 0203 is forbidden on port g9 within VLAN 8 console config interface vlan 8 console config if bridge multicast address 0100 5e02 0203 console config if bridge multicast forbidden address 0100 5802 0203 add ethernet e9 3 4 5 bridge multicast forward unregistered The bridge multicast forward unregistered interface configuration command enables forwarding unregistered multicast addresses Use the no form of this command to return to default Syntax bridge multicast forward unregistered add remove ethernet interface list port channel port channelnumber list no bridge multicast forward unregistered add Force forwarding of unregistered multicast packets remove Don t force forwarding of unregistered multicast packets interface list Separate nonconsecutive Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of ports Range Valid Ethernet port port channel number list Separ
275. no form of this command Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 Default Configuration The default forwarding time for IEEE Spanning tree Protocol STP is 15 seconds Command Modes Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures spanning tree bridge forward time to 25 seconds Console config spanning tree forward time 25 5 21 4 spanning tree hello time The spanning tree hello time global configuration command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time which is how often the switch broadcasts hello messages to other switches To reset the default hello time use the no form of this command User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax spanning tree hello time seconds no spanning tree hello time seconds Time in seconds Range 1 10 Default Configuration The default hello time for IEEE Spanning Tree Protocol STP is 2 seconds Command Modes Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures spanning tree bridge hello time to 5 seconds Console config spanning tree hello time 5 5 21 5 spanning tree max age The spanning tree max age global configuration command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age To
276. nooping mrouter time out The ip igmp snooping mrouter time out interface configuration command configures the mrouter time out The mrouter time out command is used for setting the aging out time after multicast router ports are automatically learned To configure the default mrouter time out use the no form of this command Syntax ip igmp snooping mrouter time out time out no ip igmp snooping mrouter time out time out mrouter timeout in seconds Range 1 2147483647 Default Configuration The default value is 300 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the mrouter timeout to 200 seconds User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console config interface vian 2 Console config if ip igmp snooping mrouter time out 200 5 9 6 ip igmp snooping leave time out The ip igmp snooping leave time out command configures the leave time out If an IGMP report for a multicast group is not received within the leave time out period after an IGMP leave was received from a specific port the current port is deleted from the member list of that multicast group To configure the default leave time out use the no form of this command Syntax ip igmp snooping leave time out time out immediate leave no ip igmp snooping leave time out time out leave time out in seconds Range 0
277. nterface configuration command sets an IP address To remove an IP address use the no form of this command Syntax ip address p address mask prefix length no ip address p address p address IP address mask The IP address network mask The IP address network mask 255 0 0 0 prefix length 8 to 255 255 255 252 prefix length 30 prefix length The number of bits that comprise the IP address prefix The prefix length must be preceded by a forward slash Range 8 30 Default Configuration No IP address is defined for interfaces Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet VLAN port channel out of band Ethernet User Guidelines An IP address cannot be configured for a range of interfaces range context Example The following example configures VLAN 1 with the IP address 131 108 1 27 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 131 108 1 27 255 255 255 0 5 10 2 ip address dhcp The ip address dhcp interface configuration command acquires an IP address on an interface from the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server To deconfigure any acquired address use the no form of this command The no ip address dhcp command deconfigures any IP address that was acquired thus sending a DHCPRELEASE message Syntax ip address dhcp hostname host name no ip address dhcp hostname Specifies the host name host
278. ntication Console config snmp server host 10 1 1 1 management 2 5 20 6 snmp server host The snmp server host global configuration command specifies the recipient of Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation To remove the specified host use the no form of this command Syntax snmp server host host addr community string 1 2 no snmp server host host adar host address Internet address of the host the targeted recipient An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the User Guidelines User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation R ange 1 20 characters 1 SNMPv1 traps is used 2 SNMPv2 traps is used Default Default Configuration The default is SNMPv2 UDP Port 162 timeout 15 seconds retries 3 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines If a trap and inform are defined on the same target and an inform was sent the trap is not sent An inform request is held in memory until a response is received or the request times out An inform can be resent or retried several times but traps are sent only once Network traffic is increased with retries Therefore traps and informs require a trade off between reliability and resources Inform requests should be used if it is important that the SNMP manager receives every notification If traffic on th
279. ntp server host jjp address IP address of the server An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines hostname Hostname of the server Range 1 160 characters poll Enable polling key keyed Authentication key to use when sending packets to this peer Range 1 4294967295 18 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration No servers are defined Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Up to 8 sntp servers can be defined Use the sntp unicast client enables global configuration command to enable predefined unicast clients globally To enable polling you should also use the sntp unicast client poll global configuration command for global enabling Polling time is determined by the sntp client poll timer global configuration command To define an SNTP server on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Examples The following example configures the device to accept Network Time Protocol NTP traffic from the server on 192 1 1 1 Console config sntp server 192 1 1 1 5 5 15 show clock The show clock user EXEC command displays the time and date from the system clock Syntax show clock Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following ex
280. number A valid port channel number permanent The address can only deleted by the no bridge address command delete on reset The address is deleted after reset delete on timeout The address is deleted after age out time has expired secure The address is deleted after the port changes mode to unlock learning no port security command This parameter is only available when the port is in learning locked mode Default Configuration No static addresses are defined The default mode for an added address is permanent Command Mode Interface configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example adds a permanent static MAC layer station source address 3aa2 64b3 a245 on port e8 to the bridge table console config interface vlan 2 console config vlan bridge address 3aa2 64b3 a245 ethernet e8 permanent 5 4 2 bridge multicast filtering The bridge multicast filtering global configuration command enables filtering of multicast addresses To disable filtering of multicast addresses use the no form of the bridge multicast filtering command Syntax bridge multicast filtering no bridge multicast filtering 15 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration Disabled All multicast addresses are flooded to all ports of the relevant VLAN Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guide
281. number of queues to be expedite queues The expedite queues would be the queues with higher indexes The range is 1 8 Default Configuration All queues are expedite queues Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines When configuring the priority queue out num of queues command the weighted round robin WRR weight ratios are affected because there are fewer queues participating in WRR Example The following example sets queue 7 8 to be an EF queue Console config priority queue out num of queues 2 5 17 6 show qos interface The show qos interface user EXEC command displays interface QoS data User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax show qos interface ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number buffers queuing policers shapers ethernet interface number Ethernet port number vlan vian id VLAN number port channel number Port channel buffers Displays buffer setting for the interface queues For gigabit Ethernet interfaces the queue depth for each of the 8 queues and the thresholds for the WRED Tail Drop are displayed For 10 100 interfaces the minimum reserved settings are displayed queuing Displays the queue strategy WRR or EF the weight for WRR queues the CoS to queue map and the EF priority shapers Displays the specified interface shaper and the shaper for the queue on the specified interface poli
282. oadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Frame Income Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Tag is removed Frame remain untagged In this field there are five items such as Create VLAN Port setting Ports to VLAN VLAN to Ports GVRP 41 Us
283. obal Configuration mode User Guidelines The command is not saved in the router configuration however the certificate and keys generated by this command are saved User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 in the private configuration which is never displayed to the user or backed up to another device Example The following example regenerates a HTTPS certificate Console enable crypto certificate generate key generate 5 28 6 show ip http The show ip http privileged EXEC command displays the HTTP server configuration Syntax show ip http Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC command User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the HTTP server configuration Console show ip http HTTP server enable Port 80 5 28 7 show ip https The show ip http privileged EXEC command displays the HTTPS server configuration Syntax show ip https Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC command User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the HTTP server configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console show ip https HTTPS server enabled Port 443 Certificate was generated 5 29 802 1x Commands 5 29 1 aaa authenticat
284. ocol is used to classify network flows OSPF by which matches the packet to the Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol UDP which indicates that the User Datagram Protocol is used to classify network flows Protocol ID to Match adds user defined protocols to which packets are matched to the ACE Each protocol has a specific protocol number which is unique The possible field range is 0 255 This filters packets by TCP flag Filtered packets are either forwarded or dropped Filtering packets by TCP flags increases packet control and network security The values that can be assigned are e Set which enables filtering packets by selected flags e Unset disables filtering packets by selected flags e Don t care which indicates that selected packets do not influence the packet 58 Source Port Destination Port Source IP Address Wildcard Mask Destination IP Address Wildcard Mask Match DSCP Match IP Precedence User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 filtering process The TCP Flags that can be selected are e Urg indicates the packet is urgent e Ack indicates the packet is acknowledged e Psh indicates the packet is pushed e Rst indicates the connection is dropped e Syn indicates request to start a session e Fin indicates request to close a session Defines the TCP UDP source port to which the ACE is matched This field is active only if 800 6 TCP or 800 17 UDP is selected in the Select
285. ode User Guidelines Do not include spaces in the text string Example The following example sets the device location as New_York Console config snmp server location New_York 5 20 4 snmp server enable traps The snmp server enable traps global configuration command enables the switch to send SNMP traps To disable SNMP traps use the no form of the command Syntax snmp server enable traps no snmp server enable traps Default Configuration Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Examples The following example displays the command to enable SNMP traps Console config snmp server enable traps 5 20 5 snmp server trap authentication The snmp server trap authentication global configuration command enables the switch to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps when authentication fails To disable SNMP authentication failed traps use the no form of this command Syntax snmp server trap authentication no snmp server trap authentication Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays the command to enable authentication failed SNMP traps Console config snmp server trap authe
286. ode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the last TDR Time Domain Reflectometry tests on all ports Console show copper ports tdr Port Result Length Date meters el OK e2 Short 50 13 32 00 23 July 2003 e3 Test has not been preformed e4 Short 128 13 32 00 23 July 2003 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 e5 Fiber 5 14 3 show copper ports cable length The show copper ports cable length privileged EXEC command displays the estimated copper cable length attached to a port Syntax show copper ports cable length interface interface A valid Ethernet port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This feature works only on 1 Gbps ports Example The following example displays the estimated copper cable length attached to all ports Console show copper ports cable length Port Length meters el lt 50 e2 Giga link not active e3 110 140 e4 Fiber 5 14 4 show fiber ports optical transceiver The show fiber ports optical transceiver privileged EXEC command displays the optical transceiver diagnostics Syntax show fiber ports optical transceiver interface detailed interface A valid Ethernet port User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Detailed Detailed diagnostics Default
287. ode can be configured only when auto negotiation is disabled and port speed is set to 10Mbps or 100Mbps It cannot be configured on Link Aggregation Groups LAGs MDI MDIX Shows the MDI MDIX status of the port To use the MDI setting if the port is connected to an end station To use the MDIX setting if the port is connected to a hub or another switch Flow control Shows the flow control status of the port It is active when the port uses Full Duplex Mode 36 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Type Shows the port type LAG Shows whether the port is part of a LAG PVE It bypasses the Forwarding Database and forwards all unicast multicast and broadcast traffic to an uplink when a port is a Private VLAN Edge PVE port Uplinks can be ports or LAGs Detail It will open the port configuration detail screen Click the Detail button for more detail port configuration the Port Configuration Detail screen see figure 4 10 Port zg A Description Port Type 1000M copper Admin Status Up w Current Port Status Up Reactivate Suspended Port Operational Status Active Admin Speed Current Port Speed 1000M Admin Duplex Current Duplex Mode Full Auto Negotiation Enable Y Current Auto Negotiation Enable Admin Advertisement Max Capability 10 Half 10 Full 100 Half 100 Full 1000 Full Current Advertisement 10 Half 10 Full 100 Half 100 Full 1000 Full Neighbor Advertisement 10 Half 10 Full 100 Half 100 Full 1000 Full Back Pressur
288. of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port The Max Entries field is enabled only if Locked is selected in the Interface Status field In addition the Limited Dynamic Lock mode is selected The default is 1 Action on Violation Where indicates the action to be applied to packets arriving on a locked port The possible field values are e Discard which discards packets from any unlearned source This is the default value e Forward Normal forwards packets from an unknown source without learning the MAC address e Discard Disable which discards packets from any unlearned source and shuts down the port The port remains shut down until reactivated or until the device is reset Enable Trap This enables traps when a packet is received on a locked port Trap Frequency Which the amount of time in seconds between traps The default value is 10 seconds A Notice In order to change the Learning Mode the Lock Interface must be set to unlocked Once the mode is changed the Lock Interface can be reinstated 79 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 7 6 Multiple Hosts The Multiple Hosts screen see figure 4 35 allows network managers to configure advanced port based authentication settings for specific ports and VLANs Statistics ACL VLAN Config Config Port Enable Multiple Hosts Action on Violation Enable Traps Trap Frequency lt lt Previous 1 2 Next gt gt Number of
289. of valid VLAN IDs to add Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces a hyphen designates a range of IDs all All existing static VLANs Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines Commands under the interface range context are executed independently on each interface in the range If the command returns an error on one of the interfaces an error message is displayed and execution continues on other interfaces Example The following example groups VLAN 221 until 228 and VLAN 889 to receive the same command Console config interface range vlan 221 228 889 Console config if 5 27 6 name The name interface configuration command adds a name to a VLAN To remove the VLAN name use the no form of this command Syntax name string no name string Unique name up to 32 characters in length to be associated with this VLAN Default Configuration No name is defined Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines The VLAN name should be unique Example The following example names VLAN number 19 with the name Marketing Console config interface vlan 19 Console config if name Marketing 5 27 7 switchport mode The switchport mode interface configuration command configures the VLAN membership mode of a port
290. ollisions Internal MAC Tx Errors Oversize Packets Internal MAC Rx Errors Received Pause Frames Transmitted Pause Frames User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Counted transmitted broadcast packets Counted frames received that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check Counted frames that are involved in a single collision and are subsequently transmitted successfully Counted times that a collision is detected later than one slotTime into the transmission of a packet Counted frames for which transmission fails due to excessive collisions Counted frames for which transmission fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Counted frames received that exceed the maximum permitted frame size Counted frames for which reception fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error Counted MAC Control frames received with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation Counted MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation 5 7 18 show ports jumbo frame The show ports jumbo frame user EXEC command displays the jumbo frames configuration Syntax show ports jumbo frame Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Modes User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the jumbo frames configuration Consol
291. ollowing fields Interface Indicates the port or LAG on which STP is enabled STP which indicates if STP is enabled on the port Port Fast Indicates if Fast Link is enabled on the port If Fast Link mode is enabled for a port the Port State is automatically placed in the Forwarding state when the port link is up Fast Link optimizes the STP protocol convergence STP convergence can take 30 60 seconds in large networks Port State Displays the current STP state of a port If enabled the port state determines what forwarding action is taken on traffic Possible port states are e Disabled indicates that STP is currently disabled on the port The port forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses e Blocking where indicates that the port is currently blocked and cannot forward traffic or learn MAC addresses Blocking is displayed when Classic STP is enabled e Listening where indicates that the port is in Listening mode The port cannot forward traffic nor can it learn MAC addresses e Learning where indicates that the port is in whose mode The port cannot forward traffic however it can learn new MAC addresses e Forwarding the port that can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses Speed Indicates the speed at which the port is operating Path Cost Default Path Cost Priority Designated Bridge ID Designated Port ID Designated Cost Forward Transitions User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Indicates the
292. ommand ends the current configuration session and returns to the privileged command mode Syntax end Default Configuration This command has no default configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode All Command modes User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example ends the current configuration session and returns to the previous command mode Console config end Console 5 26 8 help The help command displays a brief description of the help system Syntax help Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode All Command modes User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command 5 26 9 history The history line configuration command enables the command history function To disable the command history feature use the no form of this command Syntax history no history Default Configuration The history function is enabled User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enables the command history function for telnet Console config line telnet Console config line history 5 26 10 history size The history size line configuration command changes the command history buffer size for a particular line To res
293. ommand specifies authentication methods for https servers To return to the default use the no form of this command Syntax ip https authentication method method2 no ip https authentication method method2 Specify at least one from the following table Keyword Source or destination local Uses the local username database for authentication none Uses no authentication radius Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication tacacs Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication Default Configuration The local user database is checked This has the same effect as the command ip https authentication local Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error not if it fails To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error specify none as the final method in the command line Example The following example configures https authentication console config ip https authentication radius local User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 3 7 show authentication methods The authentication methods privilege EXEC command displays information about the authentication methods Syntax show authentication methods Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guide
294. on command locks the port By locking the port new addresses are not learned on the port To enable new address learning use the no form of the port security command Syntax port security forward discard discard shutdown trap seconds no port security forward Forwards frames with unlearned source addresses but does not learn the address discard Discards frames with unlearned source addresses This is the default if no option is indicated discard shutdown Discards frames with unlearned source addresses The port is also shut down trap Seconds Sends SNMP traps and defines the minimal amount of time in seconds between two consecutive traps Range 1 1 000 000 Default Configuration Disabled No port security Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example frame forwarding is enabled without learning and with traps sent every 100 seconds on port e18 console config interface ethernet e18 console config if port security forward trap 100 5 4 12 port security routed secure address The port security routed secure address interface configuration command adds MAC layer secure addresses to a routed 16 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 port Use the no form of this command to delete the MAC addresses Syntax port security routed secure address ma
295. onfiguration Feature Default Value Enable state STP enabled for all ports Port priority 128 Port cost 19 Bridge Priority 32 768 User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge A Notice The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the
296. onfiguration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example the number of addresses present in the VLANs are displayed console show bridge address table count Capacity 8192 Free 8084 Used 108 Secure 0 Dynamic addresses 97 Static addresses 2 Internal addresses 9 vian Dynamic Static 1 75 1 19 22 1 5 4 16 show bridge multicast address table The show bridge multicast address table privileged EXEC command displays multicast MAC address table information Syntax show bridge multicast address table vlan vian ic address mac multicast address ip multicast address format ip mac vlan_id A VLAN ID value mac multicast address A MAC multicast address jp multicast address An IP multicast address format Multicast address format Can be ip or mac If format is unspecified the default is mac 16 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example multicast MAC address table information is displayed User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 console show bridge multicast address table Vlan MAC Address Type Ports 1 0100 5e02 0203 static e1 g2 19 0100 5e02 0208 static e1 8 19 0100 5e02 02
297. onfiguration size packet_size The default is 40 bytes ttl max ttl The default is 30 count packet_count The default count is 3 timeout time_out The default is 3 seconds Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines The traceroute command works by taking advantage of the error messages generated by routers when a datagram exceeds its time to live TTL value The traceroute command starts by sending probe datagrams with a TTL value of one This causes the first router to discard the probe datagram and send back an error message The traceroute command sends several probes at each TTL level and displays the round trip time for each The traceroute command sends out one probe at a time Each outgoing packet may result in one or two error messages A time exceeded error message indicates that an intermediate router has seen and discarded the probe A destination unreachable error message indicates that the destination node has received the probe and discarded it because it could not deliver the packet If the timer goes off before a response comes in the traceroute command prints an asterisk The traceroute command terminates when the destination responds when the maximum TTL is exceeded or when the user interrupts the trace with Esc To find the trace to an out of band IP address use the out of band IP address format oob ip address User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Examples console gt trace
298. onfiguration which is never displayed to the user or backed up to another device This command may take a considerable period of time to execute Example The following example generates RSA key pairs Console config crypto key generate rsa 5 22 5 ip ssh pubkey auth The ip ssh pubkey auth global configuration command enables public key authentication for incoming SSH sessions To disable this function use the no form of this command Syntax ip ssh pubkey auth no ip ssh pubkey auth Default Configuration The function is disabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines AAA authentication is independent Example The following example enables public key authentication for incoming SSH sessions Console config ip ssh pubkey auth 5 22 6 crypto key pubkey chain ssh The crypto key pubkey chain ssh global configuration command enters SSH Public Key chain configuration mode The mode is used to manually specify other device public keys such as SSH client public keys User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax crypto key pubkey chain ssh Default Configuration By default there are no keys Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enters the SSH Public Key chain configuration mode Console config crypto key pubkey chain ssh Console config pubke
299. onnect the fiber cable 1 Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media Converter 3 Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly 4 Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link failed Co works with some fiber NICs or Media Converters set the Link mode to 1000 Force is needed Remove the transceiver module 1 Make sure there is no network activity by consult or check with the network administrator Or through the management interface of the switch converter if available to disable the port in advance 2 Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently 3 Turn the handle of the MGB MFB module to horizontal 4 Pull out the module gently through the handle A Figure 2 8 Pull out the SFP transceiver Never pull out the module without pull the handle or the push bolts on the module Direct pull out the A Notice module with violent could damage the module and SFP module slot of the device 23 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 3 CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device
300. onth The month of the year in which DST ends every year The possible field range is Jan Dec e Time The time at which DST ends every year The field format is Hour Minute for example 05 30 To m SNTP Server Enter a user defined SNTP server IP addresses or hostname Up to twot SNTP servers can be Server defined The primary server provides SNTP information Server2 The backup server provides SNTP information Poll Interval Defines the interval in seconds at which the SNTP server is polled for Unicast information The factory default value is 1024 60 86400 sec The Switch supports the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP assures accurate XA Notice network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server SNTP operates only as a client and cannot provide time services to other systems 35 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 3 Port Configuration In this field you can see these parts such as port settings Link aggregation LACP 4 3 1 Port settings To use the port settings screen for setting up each of the switch s ports It shows these parts port description admin status link status speed duplex MDI MDIX Flow control type LAG PVE see Figure 4 9 PLANET M CELANET E cos E caen lt lt Previous 1 2 Next gt gt
301. or messages logging This command sends debug or error messages to a logging process which logs messages to designated locations asynchronously to the process that generated the messages To disable the logging process use the no form of this command User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax logging on no logging on Default Configuration Logging is enabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The logging process controls the distribution of logging messages to the various destinations such as the logging buffer logging file or syslog server Logging on and off for these destinations can be individually configured using the logging buffered logging file and logging global configuration commands However if the logging on command is disabled no messages are sent to these destinations Only the console receives messages Example The following example shows how logging is enabled Console config logging on 5 24 2 logging The logging global configuration command logs messages to a syslog server To delete the syslog server with the specified address from the list of syslogs use the no form of this command Syntax logging ip address port port severity level facility facility description tex no logging ip address jjp address IP address of the host to be used as a syslog server An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guide
302. orbidden Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 16 Ports to VLAN screen The page contains the following fields VLAN Access Trunk General Tagged Untagged Forbidden Exclude Where means the VLAN number Indicates the port belongs to a single untagged VLAN When a port is in Access mode the packet types which are accepted on the port cannot be designated Ingress filtering cannot be enabled disabled on an access port Which indicates the port belongs to VLANs in which all ports are tagged except for one port that can be untagged Which indicates the port belongs to VLANs and each VLAN is user defined as tagged or untagged full 802 1Q mode Defines the interface as a tagged member of a VLAN All packets forwarded by the interface are tagged The packets contain VLAN information Packets forwarded by the interface are untagged Forbidden ports are not included in the VLAN Excludes the interface from the VLAN However the interface can be added to the VLAN through GVRP 44 4 4 4 GVRP User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP is specifically provided for automatic distribution of VLAN membership information among VLAN aware bridges GVRP allows VLAN aware bridges to automatically learn VLANs to bridge ports mapping without having to individually configure each bridge and register VLAN membership The Global System LAG information displays the same field information as
303. orce authorized Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example enables 802 1X authentication on the interface Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if dot1x port control auto 5 29 4 dot1x re authentication The dot1x re authentication interface configuration command enables periodic re authentication of the client Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x re authentication no dot1x re authentication This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Periodic re authentication is disabled Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Examples The following example enables periodic re authentication of the client Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if dot1x re authentication 5 29 5 dot1x timeout re authperiod The dot1x timeout re authperiod interface configuration command sets the number of seconds between reauthentication attempts Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds no dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds Number of seconds between re authentication attempts Range 300 4294967295 Defa
304. orm of this command Syntax enable password level level password encrypted no enable password level level password Password for this level from 1 to 159 characters in length level level Level for which the password applies If not specified the level is 15 Range 1 15 encrypted Encrypted password entered copied from another device configuration Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command 15 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Example The following example sets a local level 15 password abc to control access to user and privilege levels console config line enable password level 15 abc 5 3 10 username The username global configuration command establishes a username based authentication system To remove a user name use the no form of this command Syntax username name password password privilege level encrypted no username name The name of the user password The authentication password for the user from 1 to 159 characters in length evel The user level Range 1 15 encrypted Encrypted password entered copied from another device configuration Default Configuration The default privilege level is 1 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Up to 30 users can be defined o
305. ort indicates port statistics are displayed e LAG indicates LAG statistics are displayed Indicates the amount of time that passes before the GVRP statistics are refreshed The possible field values are e No Refresh indicates that the GVRP statistics are not refreshed e 15 Sec which indicates that the GVRP statistics are refreshed every 15 seconds e 30 Sec which indicates that the GVRP statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds e 60 Sec which indicates that the GVRP statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds The GVRP Statistics Table contains the following fields Join Empty Empty Leave Empty Join In Leave In Leave All Which displays the device GVRP Join Empty statistics Displays the device GVRP Empty statistics By which displays the device GVRP Leave Empty statistics By which displays the device GVRP Join In statistics By which displays the device GVRP Leave in statistics By which displays the device GVRP Leave all statistics The GVRP Error Statistics Table contains the following fields Invalid Protocol ID Invalid Attribute Type Attribute Value Invalid Events Where displays the device GVRP Invalid Protocol ID statistics Where displays the device GVRP Invalid Attribute ID statistics Invalid Displays the device GVRP Invalid Attribute Value statistics Invalid Attribute Length where displays the device GVRP Invalid Attribute Length statistics Where displays the device GVRP Inval
306. ort dynamic resolution static ARP cache entries do not need to be specified Example The following example adds the IP address 198 133 219 232 and MAC address 00 00 0c 40 0f bc to the ARP table Console config arp 198 133 219 232 0000 0c40 0fbc ethernet e8 5 10 6 arp timeout The arp timeout global configuration command configures how long an entry remains in the ARP cache To restore the default value use the no form of this command Syntax arp timeout seconds no arp timeout seconds seconds Time in seconds that an entry remains in the ARP cache Range 1 40000000 Default Configuration The default timeout is 60000 seconds User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines It ls recommended not to set the timeout value to less than 3600 Note The ARP entry is deleted between the period of the timeout value and twice the timeout value For example if the timeout value is 20 seconds the ARP value is deleted during the period of 20 to 40 seconds Example The following example configures ARP timeout to 12000 seconds Console config arp timeout 12000 5 10 7 clear arp cache The clear arp cache privileged EXEC command deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cache Syntax clear arp cache Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines
307. ould be increased from the default value For example if the number of dynamic VLANs is 400 it is recommended to increase the leave time Example The following example sets the leave timer for port e8 to 900 milliseconds Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if f garp timer leave 900 5 8 4 gvrp vlan creation forbid The gvrp vian creation forbid interface configuration command enables or disables dynamic VLAN creation To disable dynamic VLAN creation use the no form of this command Syntax gvrp vlan creation forbid no gvrp vlan creation forbid Default Configuration By default dynamic VLAN creation is enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines This command forbids dynamic VLAN creation from the interface The creation or modification of dynamic VLAN registration entries as a result of the GVRP exchanges on an interface are restricted only to those VLANs for which static VLAN registration exists Example The following example disables dynamic VLAN creation on port e8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if gvrp vlan creation forbid User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 8 5 gvrp registration forbid The gvrp registration forbid interface configuration command de registers all dynamic VLANs and prevents dynamic VLAN registration on the port To allow dynamic registering for VLANs on
308. ounters for interface g1 are cleared console clear counters ethernet g1 5 7 13 set interface active The set interface active privileged EXEC mode command reactivates an interface that was suspended by the system 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax set interface active ethernet interface port channel port channel numben interface Valid Ethernet port port channel number Valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privilege EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example activates interface e5 which is disabled console set interface active ethernet e5 5 7 14 show interfaces configuration The show interfaces configuration Privilege EXEC mode command displays the configuration for all configured interfaces Syntax show interfaces configuration ethernet interface port channel port channel number Interface Valid Ethernet port port channel number Valid port channel trunk index oob interface Out of band Ethernet port number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Modes Privilege EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the configuration for all configured interfaces console show interfaces
309. port priority interface configuration command configures the priority value for physical ports To reset to default priority value use the no form of this command Syntax lacp port priority value no lacp port priority value Port priority value Range 1 65535 Default Configuration The default port priority value is 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the priority value for port e8 to 247 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if f lacp port priority 247 5 11 3 lacp timeout The lacp timeout interface configuration command assigns an administrative LACP timeout To reset the default administrative LACP timeout use the no form of this command User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax lacp timeout long short no lacp timeout long Specifies a long timeout value Short Specifies a short timeout value Default Configuration The default port timeout value is long Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example assigns an administrative LACP timeout for port e8 to a long timeout value Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if lacp timeout long 5 11 4 show lacp ethernet Th
310. protocol protocols group VLAN database command adds a special protocol to a named group of protocols which may be used for protocol based VLAN assignment To delete a protocol from a group use the no form of this command Syntax map protocol protocol encapsulation protocols group group no map protocol protocol encapsulation protocol The protocol is a protocol number or one of the reserved names The format is Hex format encapsulation One of the following values ethernet rfc1042 IlcOther If no option is indicated the default is ethernet group Group number of group of protocols associated together Range 1 2147483647 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode VLAN Database mode User Guidelines The following protocol names are reserved ip arp ipx Example The following example maps protocol ip arp to the group named 213 Console config vlan database Console config vlan map protocol ip arp protocols group 213 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 27 17 switchport general map protocols group vian The switchport general map protocols group vian interface configuration command sets a protocol based classification rule To delete a classification use the no form of this command Syntax switchport general map protocols group group vian vian id no switchport general map protocols group group group Group number as
311. r EXEC command displays the QoS status Syntax show gos Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays a device where basic mode is supported User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console show qos Qos basic Basic trust dscp 5 17 3 wrr queue cos map The wrr queue cos map global configuration command maps assigned CoS values to select one of the egress queues To return to the default values use the no form of this command Syntax wrr queue cos map queue id cos1 cosn no wrr queue cos map queue id queue id The queue number to which the following CoS values are mapped cos1 cosn Map to specific queues up to eight CoS values from 0 to 7 Default Configuration The map default values are as follows CoS value 1 select queue 1 CoS value 2 select queue 2 CoS value 0 select queue 3 CoS value 3 select queue 4 CoS value 4 select queue 5 CoS value 5 select queue 6 CoS value 6 select queue 7 CoS value 7 select queue 8 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines You can use this command to distribute traffic into different queues where each queue is configured with different weighted round robin WRR and Weighted Random Early Detection WRED parameters You enable the expedite queues by using the priority
312. r authentication Uses username tacacs Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication Uses username Default Configuration The local user database is checked This has the same effect as the command aaa authentication login listname local XA Notice On the console login succeeds without any authentication check if the authentication method is not defined User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The default and optional list names created with the aaa authentication login command are used with the login authentication command Create a list by entering the aaa authentication login ist name method command for a particular protocol where ist name is any character string used to name this list The method argument identifies the list of methods that the authentication algorithm tries in the given sequence The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error not if it fails To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error specify none as the final method in the command line Example The following example configures authentication login console config aaa authentication login default radius local enable none 5 3 2 aaa authentication enable The aaa authentication enable global configuration command defines authentication method lists for accessing higher privi
313. r connections to ports running UNIX to UNIX Copy Program UUCP and other non Telnet protocols Description Border Gateway Protocol Character generator Remote commands Daytime Discard Domain Name Service Echo Exec Finger Port number 179 19 514 13 53 512 79 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 ftp File Transfer Protocol 21 ftp data FTP data connections 20 gopher Gopher 70 hostname NIC hostname server 101 ident Ident Protocol 113 irc Internet Relay Chat 194 klogin Kerberos login 543 kshell Kerberos shell 544 login Login 513 Ipd Printer service 515 nntp Network News Transport Protocol 119 pop2 Post Office Protocol v2 109 pop3 Post Office Protocol v3 110 pim auto rp PIM Auto RP 496 smtp Simple Mail Transport Protocol 25 sunrpc Sun Remote Procedure Call 111 syslog Syslog 514 tacacs TAC Access Control System 49 talk Talk 517 telnet Telnet 23 time Time 37 uucp Unix to Unix Copy Program 540 whois Nickname 43 www World Wide Web 80 Example Console gt telnet 176 213 10 50 Esc U sends telnet EL 5 23 4 resume The resume command in EXEC mode is used to switch to another open Telnet session User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax resume connection connection The connection number The default is the most recent connection Default Configuration There is no default confi
314. ration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays RMON 1 alarms User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console show rmon alarm 1 Alarm 1 OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 1 Last sample Value 878128 Interval 30 Sample Type delta Startup Alarm rising Rising Threshold 8700000 Falling Threshold 78 Rising Event 1 Falling Event 1 Owner CLI The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field OID Last Sample Value Alarm Owner Interval Sample Type Startup Alarm Description Monitored variable OID The statistic value during the last sampling period For example if the sample type is delta this value is the difference between the samples at the beginning and end of the period If the sample type is absolute this value is the sampled value at the end of the period Alarm index The entity that configured this entry The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds The method of sampling the variable and calculating the value compared against the thresholds If the value is absolute the value of the variable is compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval If the value is delta the value of the variable at the last sample is subtract
315. ration This command has no default configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how all port channel information is displayed Console config show interfaces port channel Channel Ports ch1 Active g2 ch2 Active e3 e7 Inactive g1 ch3 Active e4 e8 5 16 Port Monitor Commands 5 16 1 port monitor The port monitor interface configuration command starts a port monitoring session To stop a port monitoring session use the no form of this command Syntax port monitor src interface rx tx no port monitor src interface src interface Valid Ethernet port or port channel number 1x Monitors received packets only If no option specified monitors both rx and tx tx Monitors transmitted packets only If no option specified monitors both rx and tx Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Interface Configuration mode User Guidelines This command enables traffic on one port to be copied to another port or between the source port src interface and a destination port the port being configured Only a single target port can be defined per system The port being monitored cannot be set faster than the monitoring port User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 The following restrictions apply to ports
316. ration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets the authentication encryption key Console config tacacs server key abc s 5 25 3 tacacs server timeout The tacacs server timeout command in global configuration mode sets the timeout value To restore the default use the no form of this command Syntax tacacs server timeout timeout no tacacs server timeout User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 timeout Specifies the timeout value in seconds Range 1 1000 Default Configuration 5 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets the timeout value as 300 Console config tacacs server timeout 300 5 25 4 tacacs server source ip The tacacs server source ip command in global configuration mode specifies the source IP address that will be used for the communication with TACACS servers To return to default use the no form of this command Syntax tacacs server source ip source no tacacs server ip source Specifies the source IP address An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines Range Valid IP Address Default Configuration The IP address would be of the outgoing IP interface User Guidelines To define an out of band IP address use the out of band IP
317. re encrypts SNMP messages Operation Defines the group access rights The possible field values are e Read The management access is restricted to read only and changes cannot be made to the assigned SNMP view e Write The management access is read write and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP view e Notify Sends traps for the assigned SNMP view 4 11 4 Group Membership The Group Membership screen see figure 4 64 provides information for assigning SNMP access control privileges to SNMP groups Group Membership A User Name Engine ID O Local O Remote Group Name viv2SuperGroup v Authentication Method None v Password Authentication Key Privacy Key Log Table User Name Engine ID Group Name Authentication Method Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 64 Group Membership The page contains the following fields User name By which provides a user defined local user list Engine ID Indicates either the local or remote SNMP entity to which the user is connected Changing or removing the local SNMP Engine ID deletes the SNMPv3 User Database e Local Indicates that the user is connected to a local SNMP entity e Remote Indicates that the user is connected to a remote SNMP entity If the Engine ID is defined remote devices receive inform messages Group Name Authentication Method Password Authentication Key Privacy Key User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Contain
318. re the interface The Global Configuration mode command interface ethernet is used to enter the interface configuration mode 5 2 2 Starting the CLI The switch can be managed over a direct connection to the switch console port or via a Telnet connection The switch can also be managed via an out of band OOB management port The switch is managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system If access is via a Telnet connection ensure that the device has an IP address defined that corresponding management access is granted and that the workstation used to access the device is connected to the device prior to beginning using CLI commands XA voice The following steps are for use on the console line only To begin running CLI perform the following 1 Start the device and wait until the startup procedure is complete 2 The User Exec mode is entered into and the prompt console gt is displayed User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 3 Configure the device and enter the necessary commands to complete the required tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command When a different user is required to log onto the system in the Privileged EXEC Command mode the login command is entered This effectively logs off the current user and logs on the new user 5 2 3 Editing Features Entering
319. reated with the authentication login command Default Configuration Uses the default set with the command authentication login Command Mode Line Configuration mode 15 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines Changing login authentication from default to another value may disconnect the telnet session Example The following example specifies the default authentication method for a remote Telnet or console console config line cnsole console config line login authentication default 5 3 4 enable authentication The enable authentication line configuration command specifies the authentication method list when accessing a higher privilege level from a remote telnet or console To return to the default specified by the enable authentication command use the no form of this command Syntax enable authentication default ist name no enable authentication default Uses the default list created with the authentication enable command list name Uses the indicated list created with the authentication enable command Default Configuration Uses the default set with the command authentication enable Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example specifies the default authentication method when accessing a higher privilege level from a remote Telnet or console console
320. remove the description use the no form of this command Syntax description string no description string Comment or a description of the port up to 64 characters Default Configuration By default the interface does not have a description Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel out of band Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example adds a description to the Ethernet e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if description RD_SW 3 5 7 5 speed The speed interface configuration command configures the speed of a given Ethernet interface when not using auto negotiation To restore the default use the no form of this command Syntax speed 10 100 1000 no speed 10 Configures the port to 10 Mbps 100 Configures the port to 100 Mbps 1000 Configures the port to 1000 Mbps Default Configuration Maximum port capability Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel out of band Ethernet mode 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines The command no speed in port channel context returns each port in the port channel to its maximum capability Before attempting to force a particular duplex mode the port operating at 10 100 Mbps disable the auto negotiation on that port Example The following example configures the speed
321. requency 1 1000000 field can be defined only if multiple hosts are disabled The default is 10 seconds Status Where indicates the host status 4 7 7 Storm control A BroadcastStorm is a result of an excessive amount of broadcast messages simultaneously transmitted across a network by a single port Forwarded message responses are heaped onto the network straining network resources or causing the network to time out The system measures the incoming Broadcast and Multicast frame rate separately on each port and discard frames when the rate exceeds a user defined rate The Storm Control page provides fields for enabling and configuring Storm Control The screen in Figure 4 36 appears Setup Config Contig Statistics ACL Security Port Broadcast Control Mode Broadcast Only Rate Threshold 3500 3 Update lt lt Previous 1 2 Next gt gt Port Broadcast Control Mode Rate Threshold g2 False Broadcast Only 3500 g3 False Broadcast Only 3500 g4 False Broadcast Only 3500 g5 False Broadcast Only 3500 g6 False Broadcast Only 3500 g7 False Broadcast Only 3500 gs False Broadcast Only 3500 g9 False Broadcast Only 3500 gio False Broadcast Only 3500 gil False Broadcast Only 3500 gi2 False Broadcast Only 3500 Save Config J Cancel Config Figure 4 36 Storm Control screen The Page contains the following fields Port Displays the port number for which storm control is enabled Broadcast Con
322. rity QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Figure 4 5 Switch Main Functions Menu The following functions can be configured here E Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree 29 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Multicast SNMP Admin 4 2 Setup The Setup menus include the tree sub menus Summary m Network Settings m Time 4 2 1 Summary The summary screen provides Device and System Information about the Switch cl in EE a an Device Information System Name IP Address 192 168 1 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DNS Servers Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Address Mode Static Base MAC Address 00 30 4F 24 02 01 System Information Serial Number Model Name WGSW 24020 Hardware Version 00 03 00 Boot Version 1 0 2 Firmware Version 1 0 0 34 a v Figure 4 6 Switch System Summary screen The page contains the following informations m Device Information System Name Display the system name IP Address Display the current IP address of the device Subnet Mask Display the subnet mask address of the device DNS Servers Display the current DNS Servers no matter by manual setting or assigned by the DHCP server Default Gateway Display the current default gateway of the device 30 Address Mode Base MAC Address m System Information Serial Number Model Name Hardware Version Boot Version Fi
323. rk unreachable P Protocol unreachable Q Source quench U Port unreachable User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 23 3 telnet The telnet User EXEC command is used to log in to a host that supports Telnet Syntax telnet p address hostname porf keyword jjp address P address of the destination host An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines Range 1 160 characters host Hostname of the destination host Range Valid IP Address port A decimal TCP port number or one of the keywords from the ports table in the usage guidelines The default is the Telnet port decimal23 on the host keyword Can be one or more keywords from the keywords table in the User Guidelines Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines The Telnet software supports special Telnet commands in the form of Telnet sequences that map generic terminal control functions to operating system specific functions To issue a special Telnet command enter Esc and then a command character If you want to login to host on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Special Telnet Command character Escape Sequence Purpose Ctrl shift 6 b Break Ctrl shift 6 c Interrupt Process IP Ctrl shift 6 h Erase Character EC Ctrl shift 6 o Abort Output AO Ctrl shift 6 t Are You There
324. rmware Version System Location System Contact System Up Time Current Time User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Show the IP Address mode of the system By Static or Dynamic DHCP Display the MAC address of the Switch The unique box serial number for this Switch The product name of this Switch The release version maintenance number of the hardware The version of boot system currently running on the Switch The version of operating system currently running on the Switch Display where the Switch is located Display the administrative contact person The time in days hours and minutes since the last Switch reboot Specifies the time and date The format is hour minute second month day year 31 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 2 2 Network Settings The Basic Setup Table include the Network Settings see figure 4 7 which allows you to assign DHCP or static IP settings to interfaces and assign default gateways In the Networking Setting screen you can set these parts as below PLANET metros dcoomaicaros Setup POP Network Settings Identification System Name System Location System Contact System Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 10456 1 1466 Base Mac Address 00 03 6d 30 57 00 IP Configuration Management YLAN 1 IP Address Mode Static v Host Name IP Address 192 168 1 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway DNS Server v Save Config Cancel
325. route umaxp1 physics lsa umich edu Type Esc to abort Tracing the route to umaxp1 physics lsa umich edu 141 211 101 64 1 i2 gateway stanford edu 192 68 191 83 0 msec 0 msec O msec 2 STAN POS calren2 NET 171 64 1 213 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 3 SUNV STAN POS calren2 net 198 32 249 73 1 msec 1 msec 1 msec 4 Abilene QSV POS calren2 net 198 32 249 162 1 msec 1 msec 1 msec 5 kscyng snvang abilene ucaid edu 198 32 8 103 33 msec 35 msec 35 msec 6 iplsng kscyng abilene ucaid edu 198 32 8 80 47 msec 45 msec 45 msec 7 so 0 2 0x1 aa1 mich net 192 122 183 9 56 msec 53 msec 54 msec 8 atm1 0x24 michnet8 mich net 198 108 23 82 56 msec 56 msec 57 msec g 10 A ARB3 LSA NG c SEB umnet umich edu 141 211 5 22 58 msec 58 msec 58 msec 11 umaxp1 physics Isa umich edu 141 211 101 64 62 msec 63 msec 63 msec The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description 1 Indicates the sequence number of the router in the path to the host i2 gateway stanford edu Host name of this router 192 68 191 83 IP address of this router 1 msec 1 msec 1 msec Round trip time for each of the probes that are sent The following table describes the characters that can appear in the traceroute command output Field Description The probe timed out Unknown packet type A Administratively unreachable Usually this output indicates that an access list is blocking traffic H Host unreachable N Netwo
326. rs Port InOctets InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts el 183892 1289 987 8 e2 0 0 0 0 e3 123899 1788 373 Port OutOctets OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts e4 9188 9 8 e5 0 0 0 e6 8789 27 8 Ch InOctets InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts 1 27889 928 0 Ch OutOctets OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts 1 23739 882 0 19 78 122 The following example displays counters for port g1 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console show interfaces counters ethernet g1 Port OutOctets OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts g1 183892 1289 987 8 Port OutOctets OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts FCS Errors 8 Single Collision Frames 0 Multiple Collision Frames 0 SQE Test Errors 0 Deferred Transmissions 0 Late Collisions 0 Excessive Collisions 0 Internal MAC Tx Errors 0 Carrier Sense Errors 0 Oversize Packets 0 Internal MAC Rx Errors 0 Received Pause Frames 0 Transmitted Pause Frames 0 The following table describes the fields shown in the display Field Description InOctets Counted received octets InUcastPkts Counted received unicast packets InMcastPkts Counted received multicast packets InBcastPkts Counted received broadcast packets OutOctets Counted transmitted octets OutUcastPkts Counted transmitted unicast packets OutMcastPkts Counted transmitted multicast packets OutBcastPkts FCS Errors Single Collision Frames Late Collisions Excessive C
327. rt channel out of band Ethernet mode User Guidelines Turning off auto negotiation on an aggregate link may under some circumstances make it non operational If the other side has auto negotiation turned on it may re synchronize all members of the aggregated link to half duplex operation and may as per the standards set them all inactive Example The following example enables autonegotiation on Ethernet e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if negotiation 5 7 8 flowcontrol The flowcontrol interface configuration command configures the Flow Control on a given interface To restore the default use the no form of this command Syntax flowcontrol auto on off rx tx no flowcontrol auto Enables auto negotiation of Flow Control on Enables Flow Control off Disables Flow Control rx Enables receiving pause frames only tx Enables transmitting pause frames only 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration Flow Control is off Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines Flow Control will operate only if duplex mode is set to FULL Back Pressure will operate only if duplex mode is set to HALF When Flow Control is ON the head of line blocking mechanism of this port is disabled If a link is set to NOT use auto negotiation the other side of the link must also be configured to not use
328. ry buffer system For information about the command syntax for configuring the command history buffer see history size To display the history buffer see show history Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands the prefix keyword no can entered to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Command Completion If a command is entered and it is not complete if the command is invalid or if some parameters of the command are invalid or missing the appropriate error message is displayed This assists in entering the correct command By pressing the lt Tab gt button an incomplete command is entered If the characters already entered are not enough for the system to identify a single matching command press to display the available commands matching the characters already entered Incorrect or incomplete commands are automatically re entered next to the cursor If a parameter must be added the parameter can be added to the basic command already displayed next to the cursor The following example indicated that the command interface ethernet requires the parameter lt port num gt config interface ethernet missing mandatory parameter config interface ethernet e5 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Keyboard Shortcuts The CLI has a range of keyboard shortcuts to assist in
329. ry standard protocol designed to propagate VLAN information from device to device With GVRP a single switch is manually configured with all desired VLANs for the network and all other switches on the network learn these VLANs dynamically The gvrp enable global configuration command enables GVRP globally To disable GVRP globally on the switch use the no form of this command Syntax gvrp enable no gvrp enable Default Configuration GVRP is globally disabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example globally enables GVRP on the device Console config gvrp enable 5 8 2 gvrp enable interface The gvrp enable interface configuration command enables GVRP on an interface To disable GVRP on an interface use the no form of this command Syntax gvrp enable User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 no gvrp enable Default Configuration GVRP is disabled on all interfaces by default Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines An access port would not dynamically join a VLAN because it is always a member in only one VLAN Example The following example enables GVRP on ethernet g8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if gvrp enable 5 8 3 garp timer The garp timer interface configuration command adjusts the GARP applic
330. s contact Dell Online Technical Support Log Table Server UDP Port Facility Description servers can be defined and the log severity sent to each server Server Logs 192 168 1 51 514 Local Y Minimum Severity Error v Server UDP Port Facility 192 168 1 51 514 Local 7 Description Minimum Severity Error Figure 4 83 Server Logs screen Save Config Cancel Config The Server Logs screen see figure 4 83 contains information for viewing and configuring the Remote Log Servers New log v There are five items as below User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Server UDP Port 1 65535 Facility Description Minimum Severity Specifies the server to which logs can be sent Defines the UDP port to which the server logs are sent The possible range is 1 to 65535 The default value is 514 Defines a user defined application from which system logs are sent to the remote server Only one facility can be assigned to a single server If a second facility level is assigned the first facility is overridden All applications defined for a device utilize the same facility on a server The possible field values are Local 0 Local 7 The field default is Local 7 Where provides a user defined server description Indicates the Minimum severity from which logs are sent to the server For example if Notice is selected all logs from a Notice severity and higher ar
331. s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 This command prevents a port to be a multicast router port Example In this example forwarding all multicast packets to e6 are forbidden console config interface vlan 2 console config if bridge multicast forbidden forward all add ethernet e6 5 4 9 bridge aging time The bridge aging time global configuration command sets the address table aging time To restore the default use the no form of the bridge aging time command Syntax bridge aging time seconds no bridge aging time seconds Time is number of seconds Range 10 630 seconds Default Configuration 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example the bridge aging time is set to 250 console config bridge aging time 250 5 4 10 clear bridge The clear bridge privileged EXEC command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database Syntax clear bridge This command has no keywords or arguments Default Configuration This command has no default configuration 16 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example the bridge tables are cleared console clear bridge 5 4 11 port security The port security interface configurati
332. s a list of user defined SNMP groups SNMP groups are defined in the SNMP Group Profile page Indicates the Authentication method used The possible field values are e None that no authentication method is used to authenticate the port e MD5 Password that port authentication is performed via HMAC MD5 96 password authentication e SHA Password that port authentication is performed via HMAC SHA 96 password authentication e MD5 Key that port authentication is performed via the HMAC MD5 algorithm e SHA Key that port authentication is performed via HMAC SHA 96 authentication Define the local user password Local user passwords can contain up to 159 characters Define the HMAC MD5 96 or HMAC SHA 96 authentication level The authentication and privacy keys are entered to define the authentication key If only authentication is required 16 bytes are defined If both privacy and authentication are required 32 bytes are defined Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits Each byte can be separated by a period or a colon Defines the Privacy Key LSB If only authentication is required 20 bytes are defined If both privacy and authentication are required 36 bytes are defined Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits Each byte can be separated by a period or colon Add to List Use the button when you want to add the Group Membership configuration to the respective table
333. s description The show interfaces description user EXEC command displays the description for all configured interfaces Syntax show interfaces description ethernet interface port channel port channel number out of band eth oobinterface Interface Valid Ethernet port port channel number A valid port channel trunk index oob interface Out of band Ethernet port number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Modes Privilege EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the description for the interface g1 Console show interfaces description ethernet g1 Port Description e1 Management_port e2 R amp D_port e3 Finance_port Ch Description 1 Output 5 7 17 show interfaces counters The show interfaces counters user EXEC command displays traffic seen by the physical interface Syntax User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 show interfaces counters ethernet interface port channel port channel number interface A valid Ethernet port port channel number A valid port channel index Default Configuration This command has no default confi Command Modes Privilege EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for thi guration s command Examples The following example displays traffic seen by the physical interface Console show interfaces counte
334. server using the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP Refer to figure 4 32 Config Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Multicast SNMP Admin 802 1x Settings Parameters Enable 802 1x Port Status Port Control Enable Periodic Reauthentication Setting Timer Update Table lt lt Previous 1 2 Next gt gt Base Table More Detatils Status Port Port Control g2 g3 gt g5 g6 g gs g9 gio git gi2 ee Ne oVvVoOn nanan Port is down or not present Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Tree og ot Y Force Authorized Y Enable Periodic Reauthentication False False False False False False False False False False False v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 32 802 1x setting screen The Page contains the following fields Enable 802 1x Place a checkmark in the check box to enable 802 1x authentication Port Indicates the port name Status Port Control This specifies the port authorization state The possible field values are as follows e Force Authorized the controlled port state is set to Force Authorized forward traffic e Force Unauthorized the controlled port state is set to Force Unauthorized discard traffic Enable Periodic
335. show ClOCk AA idl Vv erin ee el le ee oe 182 5 5 16 show sntp COnmfiQuration occ A ici 183 5 517 SNOW SMIP Status ocacionales 184 5 06 Configuration and Image Fles seei osian k a a a aad tedio 185 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 BOs 1 COPY se E EE EE E E E E E E E E E E R 185 5 6 2 SHOW Startup COMMG ici e 188 5 7 Ethernet Configuration COMMANAS a e eisirean iz 190 A EAS E AS 190 5 7 2 O A een eta ee a ed es 190 STI SHUTAOWN os accessor eaten a A oi ae a ata Ae eo aaa nl eee aes 191 5 FA GOSH POM A sceeesctnes adhennyeausecanscaenetes spre ensdeen sds abophcataceeeaubeltendatp E E biaeeceesgaaacbetbauerenties 192 A setecics ta E A EE A E pede can vehi ddepadecuces vacebzeads AT T 192 5 76 duple Xai NAS 193 5 71 a 194 9 1 8 TMOWCONTMON iiredas 194 copy AAC O b O ON 195 5 7 10 back preSSure nav Mela ave aaa ee i li ee eel a ene 196 57 11 port JUMDO TAMBO suri iaei Teco sed eutcedeasba book a e add 196 5712 elear COUMLCMS aia tt opa 197 S VS SONAS A se ela Nena hal le ea Baile ae 197 5 7 14 show interfaces CONfIguratiON mces eiiiai i ai ad aeiiaaie iee dadida iiiad 198 5 7215 Show interfaces Status iii cies 199 5 7 16 show interfaces descripta ii hues 201 5 27 17 show IOTEr aces COUN E S EEEE A E E 201 5 7 18 show ports jumbo frame meriendea aa iv a eee teenie Maen a e ees 204 5 7 19 port storm control broadcast enable 0 ee cece ceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeesneeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeeaas
336. sing UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply for your device It will prevent you from network data loss or network downtime 2 In some area installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your switch from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Switch or the power adapter 2 2 Install the Switch This section describes how to install the Ethernet Switch and make connections to the Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps 2 2 1 Desktop Installation To install the Switch on desktop or shelf please follows these steps Step1 Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Switch Step2 Place the Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source Step3 Keep enough ventilation space between the Switch and the surrounding objects XA Notice When choosing a location please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 1 Section 4 and Specification Step4 Connect the Switch to network devices A Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10 100 RJ 45 ports or Gigabit RJ 45 SFP mini GBIC slot on the front of the Switch B Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers workstations or routers etc Y Notice Connection to the Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling
337. software for internal usage and the user wants to use that VLAN ID for static or dynamic VLAN he should either remove the IP interface creates the VLAN and recreate the IP interface or use this command to define explicit internal usage VLAN Examples The following example reserves a VLAN as the internal usage VLAN of an interface Console config ip internal usage vlan 10 5 27 19 show vian The show vlan privileged EXEC command displays VLAN information Syntax show vlan tag vian id name vian name vian id A valid VLAN ID vian name A valid VLAN name string Range 1 32 characters Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays all VLAN information console show vian User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Vian Name Ports 1 1 e 1 4 8 g 1 2 ch 1 8 2 VLAN_2 e2 3 VLAN_3 e3 other Required permanent Required permanent Required 5 27 20 show vlan internal usage The show vlan internal usage privileged EXEC command displays a list of VLANs being used internally by the switch Syntax show vlan internal usage Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Exa
338. spanning tree global configuration command enables spanning tree functionality To disable spanning tree functionality use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree no spanning tree Default Configuration Spanning tree is enabled Command Modes Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enables spanning tree functionality Console config spanning tree 5 21 2 spanning tree mode The spanning tree mode global configuration command configures the spanning tree protocol To return to the default configuration use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree mode stp rstp no spanning tree mode stp STP is supported rstp RSTP is supported Default Configuration Spanning tree protocol STP is supported Command Modes Global Configuration mode User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the spanning tree protocol to RSTP Console config spanning tree mode rstp 5 21 3 spanning tree forward time The spanning tree forward time global configuration command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time which is the amount of time a port remains in the listening and learning states before entering the forwarding state To reset the default forward time use the
339. sses before the interface statistics are refreshed The possible field values are e No Refresh indicates that the RMON statistics are not refreshed e 15 Sec which indicates that the RMON statistics are refreshed every 15 seconds e 30 Sec which indicates that the RMON statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds e 60 Sec which indicates that the RMON statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds which displays the number of dropped events that have occurred on the interface since the device was last refreshed Displays the number of octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed This number includes bad packets and FCS octets but excludes framing bits Displays the number of packets received on the interface including bad packets Multicast and broadcast packets since the device was last refreshed Which displays the number of good broadcast packets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed This number does not include Multicast packets Displays the number of good Multicast packets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed which displays the number of CRC and Align errors that have occurred on the interface since the device was last refreshed Displays the number of undersized packets less than 64 octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Displays the number of oversized packets over 1518 octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshe
340. su 192 168 1 20 The following examples set up the community access string public to permit read write access to SNMP protocol using the out of band port for 192 175 1 10 Console config snmp server community public rw 192 175 1 10 type oob 5 20 2 snmp server contact The snmp server contact global configuration command sets up a system contact To remove the system contact information use the no form of the command Syntax snmp server contact text no snmp server contact text Character string up to 160 characters describing the system contact information Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Do not include spaces in the text string Example The following example displays setting up the system contact point as abc_Technical_Support User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console config snmp server contact abc_Tecnical_Support 5 20 3 snmp server location The snmp server location global configuration command sets up information on where the device is located To remove the location string use the no form of this command Syntax snmp server location text no snmp server location text Character string up to 160 characters describing the system location Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration m
341. t s 259 5 18 4 radilS SErver SOUTO Pira t 260 5 18 5 radiuS Server tiIMGOUbs cuina dais 260 5 18 6 radiuS SErver OIM it aa 261 5318 7 SNOW AdIUS SEPVEIS Aaa 262 5 19 RMON Command idad 263 519 1 SHOW rmon Statistisessa aiea ei e a a eieiei ai iaa 263 5 19 2 rmoni collection HIStory E EETA TE T T A E ia 265 5 19 3 show rmon collection history A EE E ETNE E E E a aE 265 5 19 4 Show TMON NISLOLY ictericia eves 266 521 925 rmon alacant lora 269 5219 6 Show MON alarm table A A and 270 5 19 7 A A ON 271 519 8 rmon di ceda 273 519 9 SHOW Imon events niingie e a e acta ds 274 AS O AS 275 5 19 11 rmon tabl SiZe ii A shay ee de ee te es 276 5 20 SNMP Commands vars sess hoses ase A A oA cede eden oon ae eats 277 5 201 SNMP SErVEr COMMUN IY 2 2 dsesgesccensscoseeesebewsscees sensei id 277 5 20 2 SNMP SEFVER COMLACE tao cee shea echt ea E T e r E a dec de ke ath a Aten a a tee ae ane Ae ce aerate aa ea Reih 278 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 20 3Snmp Server location iii ae 279 5 20 4 Snmp Server enable taps rori aaen E e eA aE e EE a AA aa EEA EAA E T NAE AE AE E aai 279 5 20 5 snmp server trap authentication ssis iieii a 280 AEE aln Se ERa E ETETE TE tora 280 5 20 7 SNMP S rver Set m oie ee ie ene ee ee ed ee We a aaas 281 5 20 5 SNOW SNMP ati ese iS ace A ieee ate Ree ata ae Mea ee WEA 282 5 21 Spanning Tree COMIMANAS iria 284 5 211 Spaning eS iia A A ia 284 21 2 SPANNING tree MOE ii A Aaa 284 21 3
342. t ACL name with Deny MAC A that we had been created at step 1 Click Add to List button the entry would be show at the table 67 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 gt PLANET Port VLAN me aee Spanning karwortee b Conmonicston Setup Config Config Statistics ACL Security Qos Trad Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut ACL Binding Interface Port g2 Y O Lac l ACLName IP Based ACL Deny Source A MAC Based ACL Deny MAC A Y Interface Select ACL g2 Deny MAC A Delete Add New SS Save Config Cancel Config 17 Please press Save Config to save current setting A Notice If action shutdown is selected the port will be force disabled 68 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 7 Security This section is to control the security access of the Switch includes the user access and management control The Security function contains links to the following topics e ACL Binding e RADIUS e TACACS 802 1x Settings e Port Security e Multiple Hosts e Storm Control 4 7 1 ACL Binding When an ACL is bound to an interface all the ACE Access Control Event rules that have been defined are applied to the selected interface Whenever an ACL is assigned on a port LAG or VLAN flows from that ingress interface that do not match the ACL are matched to the default rule which is Drop unmatched packets You can refer to figure 4 29 Config Statistics ACL Security Qos A
343. t Based Authentication O IP Based Access Control List ACL O MAC Based Access Control List O Port Security 15 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Management O WEB Based Telnet Console Command Line management O SSH Secure Shell SSL O Access through SNMPv1 v2c and v3 security set and gets requests O Four groups history statistics alarms and events of embedded remote monitoring RMON agents for network monitoring and traffic analysis O Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP client O Virtual Cable Test VCT technology provides the mechanism to detect and report potential cabling issues such as cable opens cable shorts etc on Copper Links O EMI standards comply with FCC CE class A 1 4 Product Specification Products WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 2 Shared 48 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 Description SFP Managed Gigabit Switch Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch Hardware Specification 10 100 1000Base T Ports 24 RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports 48 RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports SFP mini GBIC Slots 2 SFP interfaces 4 SFP interfaces Shared with Port 12 and Port 24 Shared with Port 23 24 47 and 48 Switch Architecture Store and Forward Switch Fabric 48Gbps 96Gbps Switch Throughput 35 7Mpps Wire Speed 71 4Mpps Wire Speed Address Table 8K entries Share data Buffer
344. t and setup gt Layer 2 Features O Complies with the IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 3u IEEE 802 3ab IEEE 802 3z Gigabit Ethernet standard O Supports Auto negotiation and half duplex full duplex modes for all 10Base T 100Base TX and 1000Base T ports O Auto MDI MDI X detection on each RJ 45 port O Prevents packet loss with back pressure Half Duplex and IEEE 802 3x PAUSE frame flow control Full Duplex O High performance Store and Forward architecture broadcast storm control runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth O 8K MAC address table automatic source address learning and ageing O 6Mbit embedded memory for packet buffers O Supports IEEE 802 1Q Tagged based VLAN O GVRP protocol for VLAN Management O Support up to 8 Trunk groups each trunk for up to maximum 8 port with 1 6Gbps bandwidth Duplex Mode O IEEE802 1d IEEE802 1w classic Spanning Tree Algorithm or Rapid Spanning Tree support O Supports the IEEE 802 1s specification for multiple spanning trees on a single port spanning tree per VLAN Vv Quality of Service 4 priority queues on all switch ports Support for strict priority and weighted round robin WRR CoS policies Support QoS and bandwidth control on each port 00 0 0 Traffic policing policies on the switch port gt Multicast O Support IGMP Snooping v1 and v2 O Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port gt Security O 802 1x Por
345. t index used when a rising threshold is crossed Range 0 65535 fevent The Event index used when a falling threshold is crossed Range 0 65535 type type The sampling method for the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds If the method is absolute the value of the selected variable is compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval If the method is delta the selected variable value at the last sample is subtracted from the current value and the difference compared with the thresholds User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 startup direction The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid If the first sample after this entry becomes valid is greater than or equal to the rthreshold and direction is equal to rising or rising falling then a single rising alarm is generated If the first sample after this entry becomes valid is less than or equal to the fthreshold and direction is equal to falling or rising falling then a single falling alarm is generated owner name Enter a name that specifies who configured this alarm If unspecified the name is an empty string Default Configuration The following parameters have the following default values type type If unspecified the type is absolute startup direction If unspecified the startup direction is rising falling Command Mode Global Configuratio
346. ta The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Type Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below Type Meaning 0x11 Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 0x11 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is Present 0x16 Membership Report version 2 0x17 Leave a Group version 2 0x12 Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP Ahost sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members 11 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each
347. tains the following fields ACL Name New ACL Name Delete ACL Action Protocol Select from List TCP Flags User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Displays the user defined IP based ACLs Defines a new user defined IP based ACL By which deletes the selected ACL Indicates the action assigned to the packet matching the ACL Packets are forwarded or dropped In addition the port can be shutdown a trap can be sent to the network administrator or a packet assigned rate limiting restrictions for forwarding The options are as follows Permit by which forwards packets which meet the ACL criteria Deny which drops packets which meet the ACL criteria Shutdown where drops packet that meets the ACL criteria and disables the port to which the packet was addressed Ports are reactivated from the Port Management screen By which creates an ACE Access Control Event based on a specific protocol Where selects from a protocols list on which ACE can be based The possible field values are Any matches the protocol to any protocol EIGRP which indicates that the Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol EIGRP is used to classify network flows ICMP which indicates that the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP is used to classify network flows IGMP which indicates that the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to classify network flows TCP which indicates that the Transmission Control Prot
348. tatapa edinin berinai diiin 166 5 4 13 Show bridge address tables i cocoa a aan 167 5 4 14 show bridge address table static ooooocoooccconiniccnonocinononocnnnnonn conan cnn n non ieaiai rro nn rre rre rra 168 5 4 15 show bridge address table COUMt ooooocoocccccnnococcnononnnonononcnnnrnnncnono cnn ran n cnn rre rra rre 169 5 4 16 show bridge multicast address table oooooconnncccnononicinocccnnnnonnncnonannnnnnorn corn no nr rr nano rn rro rre rra 169 5 4 17 show bridge multicast filteriMg oo onnnnnnnnnniccnonnnccnnoncccnnnarncnnnannnnnorn cnn nao nr r naar rra nn rr rra nn 170 5 4 18 show ports ECU tas 171 5 5 Clock Commands enoii oat elie bath hens Sibi soe Bi ede A AL ee od Sani diate 172 A A A A O 172 DD Z CIOCK SOURCE titi A dada 173 MO e A AA 173 0 94 ClOCK SUMIMERIMO abc 174 5 5 9 sntp authentication keY corista iii 176 A E AS 176 A O NOS 177 5 5 9 sntp client Poll timer orisii oa n dedeed ston bev noen lesan bed does as a aiae hese 177 5 5 9 sntp broadcast client GMablOii ssscsctscoseeeiegeesestere nics coteteewnedesannchiynasted ea r aai endut teaa ikat s onenegeacensbepbernatinee 178 5 5 10 sntpranyCastclient Gmable yy sez A AA iaa 179 5 5 11 sntp client enable interf ce siriienenriie hates cesses decade daria 179 5 5 12 sntp unicast client enable ini aaa 180 5 5 13 sntp nicast client Pollsin Se teedie Geta heed tne vaste iii 180 NO O az uscuens tists puscdatassacdenas vaatedssagtenss rode 181 5 9 15
349. tch to the PC After making this connection configure the terminal emulation program to use the following parameters The default parameters are 38400 bps 8 data bits No parity 1 stop bit You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 3 2 Web Management The Switch provides a browser interface that lets you configure and manage the switch remotely After you set up your IP address for the Switch you can access the Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Switch You can then use your Web browser to list and manage Switch configuration parameters from one central location just as if you were directly connected to the Switch s console port Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 01 or later or Netscape Navigator 4 03 or later 25 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 3 3 SNMP Based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the Switch This management
350. tches 1 1 Packet Contents Check the contents of your package for following parts e The WGSW Managed Switch x1 e CD ROM user s manual x1 e Quick installation guide x1 e 19 rack mounting kit x1 e Power Cord x1 e RS 232 console x 1 e Rubber feet x 4 If any of these are missing or damaged please contact your dealer immediately if possible retain the carton including the original packing material and use them against to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair 1 2 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows e Section 2 Installation The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the Switch e Section 3 Configuration The section contains the information about the software function of the Switch e Section 4 Web Configuration The section explains how to manage the Switch by Web interface e Section 5 COMMAND STRUCTURE The section explains how to manage the Switch by Console interface e Appendex A The section contains cable information of the Switch 14 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 1 3 Product Feature gt Physical Port 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 Ol 2 SFP slots shared with Port 12 and Port 24 O Console interface for Switch basic management and setup O 48 Port 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 O 4 SFP slots shared with Port 23 Port 24 Port 47 and Port 48 O Console interface for Switch basic managemen
351. terface Syntax show dot1x advanced ethernet interface interface Ethernet interface Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays 802 1X advanced features for the switch User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Switch show dot1x advanced Guest VLAN 3978 Unauthenticated VLANs 91 92 Use user attributes from Authentication Server Enabled User VLAN not created Create Interface Multiple Hosts 1 1 Disabled 1 2 Enabled console show dot1x advanced ethernet 1 1 Guest VLAN 3978 Unauthenticated VLANs 91 92 Use user attributes from Authentication Server Enabled User VLAN not created Create Interface Multiple Hosts 1 1 Disabled 1 2 Enabled Single Host Violation Discard Trap Enabled Frequency 100 Status Authorized Locked Counter 9 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 TROUBLE SHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve problems If the Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Ethernet Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Switch Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Please check the VLAN port trunk
352. that comprise the source IP address prefix The prefix length must be preceded by a forward slash Range 0 32 service service Indicates service type Can be one of the following telnet ssh http https or snmp out of band eth oob interface Out of band ethernet port number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Management Access list Configuration mode User Guidelines Rules with Ethernet VLAN and port channel parameters are valid only if an IP address is defined on the appropriate interface The system supports up to 256 management access rules Example The following example shows how all ports are permitted in the access list called mlist Console config management access list mlist Console config macl permit 5 13 3 deny management The deny management access list configuration command defines a deny rule Syntax deny ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number service service User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 deny ip source p address mask mask prefix length ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number out of band eth oob interface service service ethernet interface number A valid Ethernet port number vlan vian id A valid VLAN number port channel number A valid port channel number p address Source IP address Range Valid IP Address
353. the Save Config to apply the sttings Select the VLAN ID to check if the entries be added The port is assigned to the Multicast group and the device is updated E Assigning LAGs to Receive Multicast Service 1 2 3 4 Define the VLAN ID and the Bridge Multicast Address fields Check and click the LAG to Static to join the port to the selected Multicast group Click Add to List button Click the Save Config to apply the sttings The LAG is assigned to the Multicast group and the device is updated User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 10 3 Bridge Multicast Forward All The Bridge Multicast Forward All Screen contains fields for attaching ports or LAGs to a device attached to a neighboring Multicast router switch Once IGMP Snooping is enabled Multicast packets are forwarded to the appropriate port or VLAN Refer to figure 4 60 YLAN ID Gigabit None Static Dynamic 1 Forbbiden C Multicast 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 O00000 6 0000 0006 Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 60 Multicast Bridge Forward All screen The Bridge Multicast Forward All Screen contains the following fields VLAN ID Interface LAG For which Multicast parameters are displayed This identifies a VLAN to be configured to a Multicast service Displays Interface that can be added to a Multicast service The configuration options are as follows Static
354. the ports but represents the LAG GVRP information The GVRP screen refer to 4 17 is divided into two areas GVRP and GVRP Table The field definitions for both areas are the same OU an conic Eee eee GYRP Table Enable GYRP Interface O Port el Y LAG GYRP State Dynamic YLAN Creation Y GYRP Registration E Update lt Previous 1 2 Next gt Dynamic GYRP ese SURE ors VLAN Creation Registration e2 Disabled Enabled Enabled e3 Disabled Enabled Enabled e4 Disabled Enabled Enabled e5 Disabled Enabled Enabled e6 Disabled Enabled Enabled e7 Disabled Enabled Enabled es Disabled Enabled Enabled gi Disabled Enabled Enabled g2 Disabled Enabled Enabled v Cancel Config Figure 4 17 GVRP configuration screen The page contains the following fields Enable GVRP Interface GVRP State Dynamic VLAN Creation GVRP Registration Update Enables and disables GVRP on the device Displays the interface on which GVRP is enabled Possible field values are Port indicates the port number on which GVRP is enabled LAG indicates the LAG number on which GVRP is enabled When the checkbox is checked GVRP is enabled on the interface When the checkbox is checked Dynamic VLAN creation is enabled on the interface When the checkbox is checked VLAN registration through GVRP is enabled on the device The Update button adds the configured GVRP setting to the table at the bottom of the screen
355. tiation status Specifies the capabilities to be advertised by the port Multiple options may be selected or Max Capability can be selected to cover all of the options The available options are Max Capability which indicates that the port speeds and duplex mode settings can be accepted 10 Half indicates that the port is advertising a 10Mbps half duplex mode setting 10 Full indicates that the port is advertising a 10Mbps full duplex mode setting 100 Half indicates that the port is advertising a 100Mbps half duplex mode setting 100 Full indicates that the port is advertising a 100Mbps full duplex mode setting 1000 Full indicates that the port is advertising a 1000Mbps full duplex mode setting The port advertises its capabilities to its neighbor port to begin the negotiation process This field displays the current advertisement settings Tthe neighbor port the port to which the selected interface is connected advertises its capabilities to the port to start the negotiation process This field displays the neighbor s current settings The Back Pressure feature of the selected port can be enabled or disabled Displays whether Back Pressure is enabled or disabled on the currently selected port The Flow Control feature of the selected port can be enabled or disabled Displays whether Flow Control is enabled or disabled on the currently selected port e Auto the port to automatically detect the cable type e MDI if the port is connected to an
356. tically removes the port from the previous VLAN and adds it to the new VLAN Example The following example configures a VLAN ID of 23 to the untagged layer 2 VLAN interface number e8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport access vlan 23 5 27 9 switchport trunk allowed vian The switchport trunk allowed vlan interface configuration command adds or removes VLANs from a trunk port Syntax switchport trunk allowed vlan add v an list remove vlan list add vian list List of VLAN IDs to add Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designates a range of IDs remove vian list List of VLAN IDs to remove Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designate a range of IDs Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 2 and 5 to 8 to the allowed list of e8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2 5 8 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 27 10 switchport trunk native vian The switchport trunk native vian interface configuration command defines the port as a member of the specified VLAN and the VLAN ID as the port default VLAN ID
357. time If SNMP V3 which is enabled the User Name and Security Level fields are enabled for configuration e User Name defines the user to whom SNMP notifications are sent Security Level Defines the means by which the packet is authenticated The possible field values are e No Authentication Indicates the packet is neither authenticated nor encrypted UDP Port Filter Name Timeout Retries User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 e Authentication which indicates the packet is authenticated e Privacy which indicates the packet is both authenticated and encrypted Displays the UDP port used to send notifications The default is 162 Indicates if the SNMP filter for which the SNMP Notification filter is defined Indicates the amount of time seconds the device waits before resending informs The default is 15 seconds Indicates the amount of times the device resends an inform request The default is 3 seconds Add to List ae o f Use the button when you want to add the Notification Recipient configuration to the relevant table at the bottom of the screen AAA 3 PLANET Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Notification Recipient SNMPy1 2 Notification Recipient Recipients Notification Community Notification UDP Filter a E IP Type String Version Port Name as Remes 192 168 1 51 Traps public SNMPv1 162 15 3 EA SNMPy
358. tion about log entries saved to the Log File in FLASH the time that the log generated the log severity and description of the log message The Message Log is available after reboot PLANET M Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut lt lt Previous Next gt LogIndex LogTime Severity Description dl tees aoe Error EA VEIS PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntNetMask repeat which does not exist in the page Gal nal bad ee Error eae PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntAddr repeat which does not exist in the page El aa onan 33 Error PA VEIS PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntNetMask repeat which does not exist in the page jay amanda hsa si 33 Enot eee PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntAddr repeat which does not exist in the page fl CoE boon iset Enor E TEST PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_rllpStaticRouteNextHop query which does not exist in the page ld dali Beets Eo en PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntNetMask repeat which does not exist in the page bt ios boa zio Error E Nee TEST PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntAddr repeat which does not exist in the page 8 2147483119 nora gg Alert TFTP A TftpRXERROR An error message was received 2 H ES boo zai 28 Error OESTE PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntNetMask repeat which does not exist in the page aa iisi ocio 28 Bite Bee PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntAddr repeat which does not exist in the page
359. tion process force the renegotiation with neighboring switches on all interfaces or on the specified interface Syntax clear spanning tree detected protocols ethernet interface number port channel port channel number interface A valid Ethernet port port channel number A port channel index Default Configuration If no interface is specified the action is applied to all interfaces Command Modes Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This feature should be used only when working in RSTP mode Example The following example restarts the protocol migration process forces the renegotiation with neighboring switches on g1 Console clear spanning tree detected protocols ethernet g1 5 21 15 show spanning tree The show spanning tree privileged EXEC command displays spanning tree configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax show spanning tree ethernet interface port channel port channel number show spanning tree detail active blockedports interface The full syntax is unit port Range Valid Ethernet port port channel number Port channel index Range Valid port channel instance id ID associated with a spanning tree instance Range 1 15 detail Display detailed information active Display active ports only blockedports Display blocked ports only Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Co
360. tion succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Following figure shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server 74 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Authentication server 802 1X Switch RADIUS LJ PY EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity Client EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request gt e EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request So EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept IR 5 g Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized a Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabl
361. to a hub The possible field values are Boundary Port attaches MST bridges to LAN in an outlying region If the port is a boundary port it also indicates whether the device on the other side of the link is working in RSTP or STP mode Master Port where provides connectivity from a MSTP region to the outlying CIST root Internal indicates the port is an internal port Indicates the port role assigned by the STP algorithm in order to provide to STP paths The possible field values are Root provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root device Designated indicates the port or LAG via which the designated device is attached to the LAN Alternate provides an alternate path to the root device from the root interface Backup provides a backup path to the designated port path toward the Spanning Tree leaves Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a loop by a point to point link Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or more connections connected to a shared segment Disabled which indicates the port is not participating in the Spanning Tree Defines the interface priority for specified instance The default value is 128 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Path Cost Indicates the port contribution to the Spanning Tree instance The range should always be 1200 000 000 Designated Bridge ID Where indicates that the bridge ID number that connects the link or shared LAN to the root Desi
362. to which traffic is mirrored Type Indicates the port mode configuration for port mirroring The possible field values are e RxOnly defines the port mirroring on receiving ports This is the default value e TxOnly defines the port mirroring on transmitting ports e Both which defines the port mirroring on both receiving and transmitting ports Target Port defines the port from which traffic is mirrored User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 12 6 Cable Test The Cable Test screen see figure 4 75 shows you results from performance tests on copper cables The maximum cable length that can be tested is 120 meters Cables are tested when the ports are in the down state except for the Approximate Cable Length test AP Admin Logout Cable Test Next Port Test Result Cable Fault Distance Last Update Cable Length el Test e2 Test e3 Test e Test es Test e6 Test e7 Test es Test al Test g2 Test Figure 4 75 Cable Test screen The page contains the following fields Port This is the port to which the cable is connected Test Result e OK indicates that the cable passed the test e No Cable means no cable connected to the port e Open Cable means the cable is connected on only one side e Short Cable indicates that a short has occurred in the cable Cable Fault Distance This is the distance from the port at which the cable error occurred Last Updat
363. trol LAG Mode Indicates the number of the LAG interface Up to eight LAG interfaces can be configured Indicates the description of the LAG ports Up indicates that the port is available and down shows administrator has taken the port offline after setup completed please click the Save Settings option to save current setting The port types that comprise the LAG Shows an active connection when you choose the UP button there is no active connection or the port has been taken offline by an Admiinistrator when you choose the Down button Shows the connection speed on each port and the speed can be configured only when auto negotiation is disabled on that port The port duplex mode Full transmission occurs in both directions simultaneously or Half transmission occurs in only one direction at a time This mode can be configured only when auto negotiation is disabled and port speed is set to 10Mbps or 100Mbps Shows the flow control status of the port It is active when the port runs at Full Duplex Mode Shows the current mode of the LAG interface Click the Detail button for more detail port configuration Linkl Aggregation detail configuration At per LAG detail configuration page the administrator can select ports to be the members of the LAG interface The screen 39 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 appears as follow LAG Configuration LAG 1 Description Lace El LAG Type Administrative Status Up v
364. trol This indicates whether broadcast packet types are forwarded on the specific interface Mode By which specifies the Broadcast mode currently enabled on the device The possible field values are e Unknown Unicast Multicast amp Broadcast counts Unicast Multicast and Broadcast traffic 81 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 e Multicast amp Broadcast counts Broadcast and Multicast traffic together e Broadcast Only counts only Broadcast traffic Rate Threshold Where the maximum rate packets per second at which unknown packets are forwarded The range is 70 100000 The default value is 3500 4 8 QoS Network traffic is usually unpredictable and the only basic assurance that can be offered is best effort traffic delivery To overcome this challenge Quality of Service QoS is applied throughout the network This ensures that network traffic is prioritized according to specified criteria and that specific traffic receives preferential treatment And Cos Settings Queue settings Dscp Settings Bandwidth Basic Mode Advanced mode are provided 4 8 1 CoS Settings The terms Class of Service CoS and QoS are used in the following CoS provides varying Layer 2 traffic services CoS refers to classification of traffic to traffic classes which are handled as an aggregate whole with no per flow settings CoS is usually related to the 802 1p service that classifies flows according to their Layer 2 priority as s
365. tween switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 4 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 19 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to 98 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link MW Supported Spanning Tree Protocol of WGSD Series Switch Spanning Tree Protocol STP provides tree topography for any arrangement of bridges STP also provides one path between end stations on a network eliminating loops Loops occur when alternate routes exist between hosts Loops in an extended network can cause bridges to forward traffic indefinitely resulting in increased traffic and reducing network efficiency The device supports the following Spanning Tree versions e Classic STP by which provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops e Rapid STP which detects and uses network topologies that provide faster convergence of the spanning tree without creating forwarding loops e Multiple STP which provides full connectivity for packets allocated to any VLAN Multiple STP is based on the RSTP In addition Multiple STP transmits packets assigned to different VLANs through different MST regions MST regions act as a single bridge
366. twork cabling and supply power to the Switch 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggabe and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the Switch As the Figure 2 7 appears MGB SX MGB LX Figure 2 7 Plug in the SFP transceiver Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 support both single mode and multi mode SFP transceiver The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication MVIGB SX SFP 1000BASE SX SFP transceiver MVIGB LX SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver It recommends using PLANET SFPs on the Switch If you insert a SFP transceiver that is not A Notice supported the Switch will not recognize it Before connect the other switches workstation or Media Converter 1 Make sure both side of the SFP transfer are with the same media type for example 1000Base SX to 1000Base SX 1000Bas LX to 1000Base LX 2 Check the fiber optic cable type match the SFP transfer model gt To connect to 1000Base SX SFP transfer use the multi mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type gt Toconnect to 1000Base LX SFP transfer use the single mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type 22 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 C
367. ugh 200 000 000 range for port path costs short Specifies 1 through 200 000 000 range for port path costs Default Configuration Auto Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines This command applies to all the spanning tree instances on the switch The priority value must be a multiple of 4096 The cost is set using the spanning tree cost command Example The following example sets the default path cost method to long Console spanning tree pathcost method long 5 21 13 spanning tree bpdu The spanning tree bpdu global configuration command defines BPDU handling when spanning tree is disabled on an interface Syntax spanning tree bpdu filtering flooding filtering Filter BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an interface flooding Flood BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an interface Default Configuration The default definition is flooding User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Command Modes Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The command is relevant when spanning tree is disabled globally or on a single interface Example The following example defines BPDU packet flooding when spanning tree is disabled on an interface Console config spanning tree bpdu flooding 5 21 14 clear spanning tree detected protocols The clear spanning tree detected protocols privileged EXEC command restarts the protocol migra
368. ult Configuration 3600 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets the number of seconds between re authentication attempts to 3600 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if dot1x timeout re authperiod 3600 5 29 6 dot1x re authenticate The dot1x re authenticate privileged EXEC command manually initiates a re authentication of all 802 1Xenabled ports or the specified 802 1X enabled port dot1x re authenticate ethernet interface interface The full syntax is unit port User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following command manually initiates a re authentication of the 802 1X enabled port Console config dot1x re authenticate ethernet e8 5 29 7 dot1x timeout quiet period The dot1x timeout quiet period interface configuration command sets the number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange for example the client provided an invalid password Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x timeout quiet period seconds no dot1x timeout quiet period seconds Time in secon
369. uments or keywords Default Configuration CoS Override is disabled Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet Port Channel User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines This command enables to override the CoS value of tagged packets with the value configured by the qos cos command Example The following example overrides the CoS of incoming packets Console config qos cos override 5 17 12 show qos map The show qos map user EXEC command displays all the QoS maps Syntax show qos map dscp queue policed dscp dscp mutation dscp queue Displays the DSCP to queue map policed dscp Displays the DSCP to DSCP remark table dscp mutation Displays the DSCP DSCP mutation table Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC command User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the DSCP port queue map console show qos map Dscp queue map d1 d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 O 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 Ae 02 02 02 02 02 02 03 03 03 03 2 03 03 03 03 03 03 04 04 04 04 gE 04 04 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 4 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 07 07 5k 07 07 07 07 07 07 08 08 08 08 6 08 08 08 08 The following example displays the policed DSCP map User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Policed dscp map di d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0
370. under some circumstances make it non operational If the other side has auto negotiation turned on it may re synchronize all members of the aggregated link to half duplex operation and may as per the standard set them all to Inactive When a port is added to a LAG it acquires the trunk properties as set by the administrator If the port cannot be configured accordingly it will not be added to the LAG and the user will get an appropriate error message However if the first port to join the LAG is one which cannot be configured according to the administrative settings of the LAG the port will nonetheless be added to the LAG using its port default settings An error message is generated however it is important to note that since it is then the ONLY port of the LAG the whole LAG at that point operates at the port s settings instead of the LAG administrative settings Example The following example shows how port e5 is configured to port channel number 1 without LACP Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if channel group 1 mode on 5 15 4 show interfaces port channel The show interfaces port channel user EXEC command displays port channel information which ports are members of that port channel and whether they are currently active or not Syntax show interfaces port channel port channel number port channel number Valid port channel number information to display Default Configu
371. uration command specifies the port to be used by the SSH server To use the default port use the no form of this command Syntax ip ssh port port number no ip ssh port port number Port number for use by the SSH server Range 1 65535 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Default Configuration The default value is 22 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example specifies the port to be used by the SSH server as 8080 Console config ip ssh port 8080 5 22 2 ip ssh server The ip ssh server global configuration command enables the device to be configured from a SSH server To disable this function use the no form of this command Syntax ip ssh server no ip ssh server Default Configuration This default is SSH is disabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines If encryption keys are not generated the SSH server is in standby until the keys are generated To generate SSH server keys use the commands crypto key generate rsa and crypto key generate dsa Example The following example enables the device to be configured from a SSH server Console config ip ssh server User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 5 22 3 crypto key generate dsa The ip ssh server global configuration command generates DSA key pairs Syntax crypto key generate ds
372. user should use caution when copying a file from a TFTP server to the backup configuration file because there is no check of data An attempt to display the corrupted backup configuration file show backup will result in information which is meaningless to the user or even a blank row The device does not accept new commands while files are being copied however the user does not receive notification that the device is busy copying and will ignore the command Note that this behavior occurs only at the session which initiated the copy command response to activity on other management sessions will result in a delay but will not be ignored Understanding Invalid Combinations of Source and Destination Some invalid combinations of source and destination exist Specifically the following cannot be copied If the source file and destination file are the same file xmodem cannot be a destination Can only be copied to image boot and null tftp cannot be the source and destination on the same copy Copy Character Descriptions User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Character Description For network transfers an exclamation point indicates that the copy process is taking place Each exclamation point indicates the successful transfer of ten packets 512 bytes each For network transfers a period indicates that the copy process timed out Many periods in a row typically mean that the copy process may fail Copying image
373. uthenticates the identity of a system to which Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP will synchronize To disable authentication of the identity of the system use the no form of this command Syntax sntp trusted key key number no sntp trusted key key number key number Key number of authentication key to be trusted Range 1 4294967295 Default Configuration Not trusted Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines The command is relevant for both unicast and broadcast Examples The following example authenticates key 8 Console config sntp authentication key 8 md5 ClkKey Console config sntp trusted key 8 Console config sntp authenticate 5 5 8 sntp client poll timer The sntp client poll timer global configuration command sets the polling time for the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP client To return to default use the no form of this command 17 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Syntax sntp client poll timer seconds no sntp client poll timer seconds Polling interval in seconds Range 60 1024 Default Configuration 1024 Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets the polling time for the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP client to 120 seconds Console config sntp client poll timer 120 5 5 9 sntp broadcast client enable
374. vided into different command modes Each command mode has its own set of specific commands Entering a question mark at the system prompt console prompt displays a list of commands available for that particular command mode From each mode a specific command is used to navigate from one command mode to another The standard order to access the modes is as follows User EXEC mode Privileged EXEC mode Global Configuration mode and Interface Configuration mode The following figure illustrates the command mode access path When starting a session the initial mode is the User EXEC mode Only a limited subset of commands is available in User EXEC Mode This level is reserved for tasks that do not change the configuration To enter the next level the Privileged EXEC mode a password is required The Privileged mode gives access to commands that are restricted on EXEC mode and provides access to the device Configuration mode The Global Configuration mode manages the device configuration on a global level For specific interface configurations enter the next level the Interface Configuration Mode The Interface Configuration mode configures specific interfaces in the device User EXEC Mode After logging into the device the user is automatically in user EXEC command mode unless the user is defined as a privileged user In general the user EXEC commands allow the user to perform basic tests and list system information The user level prompt
375. width Displays the amount of bandwidth assigned to the queue These values are fixed and are not user defined e 6 67 e 13 33 e 26 67 53 33 4 8 3 DSCP Settings The DSCP Settings screen see figure 4 39 enables mapping DSCP values to specific queues PLANET jee MIS Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL al QoS Spanning Tree Dra Je Seer eres ooh it DSCP Settings 1 2 3 4 lv 20 2 w 36 3 52 4 5 iw 21 20 37 3 vi 53 ay 6 lvl 22 2 38 3 54 av 7 y 23 29 39 ES 55 18 8 1 24 2x 40 3 56 9 1 e 25 2 41 3 57 4 y 10 Mm 26 lw 42 3 58 Y 1 27 43 59 12 lv 28 2 44 3w 60 4 13 Tel 29 2 45 39 61 ae 14 T 30 2 46 By 62 4y 15 ll 31 2 w 47 3v 63 de Figure 4 39 DSCP Settings screen The DSCP Settings screen contains the following fields DSCP Indicates the Differentiated Services Code Point value in the incoming packet Queue Maps the DSCP value to the selected queue 85 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 4 8 4 Bandwidth The Bandwidth screen refer to figure 4 40 allows network managers to define the bandwidth settings for a specified egress interface Modifying queue scheduling affects the queue settings globally The Bandwidth screen is not used with the Service mode as bandwidth settings are based on services Qin e e hoteios b Canmanicaton Setup Config Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut i Bandwidth Previous 1 2 3 Ne
376. witch to summer time daylight saving time To configure the software to not automatically switch to summer time use the no form of this command Syntax clock summer time recurring usa eu week day month hh mm week day month hh mm offset offsef zone acronym clock summer time date date month year hh mm date month year hh mm offset offsef zone acronym clock summer time date month date year hh mm month date year hh mm offset offset zone acronym no clock summer time recurring Indicates that summer time should start and end on the corresponding specified days every year date Indicates that summer time should start on the first specific date listed in the command and end on the second specific date in the command usa The summer time rules are the United States rules eu The summer time rules are the European Union rules 17 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 week Week of the month Range 1 4 first last day Day of the week Range first three letters by name like sun date Date of the month Range 1 31 month Month Range first three letters by name year year no abbreviation Range 2000 2097 hh mm Time in military format in hours and minutes Range hh 0 23 mm 0 59 offset offset Number of minutes to add during summer time Range 1 1440 zone acronym The acronym of the time zone to be displayed when summer time
377. with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of port channels Range Valid Port channel number Default Configuration Not forbidden Command Modes Interface configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples This example forbids port 1 to be a Forwarding unregistered multicast addresses port within VLAN 8 console config interface vlan 8 console config if bridge multicast forward unregistered add ethernet 1 5 4 7 bridge multicast forward all The bridge multicast forward all interface configuration command enables forwarding of all multicast packets on a port To restore the default use the no form of the bridge multicast forward all command Syntax bridge multicast forward all add remove ethernet interface list port channel port channel number list no bridge multicast forward all add Adds ports to the group remove Removes ports from the group interface list Separate non consecutive valid Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of ports 16 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 port channel number list Separate non consecutive valid port channels with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of port channels Default Configuration Disable forward all on all ports Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User
378. with a non integral number of octets AlignmentError It is normal for The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources during this sampling interval This number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped it is just the number of times this condition has been detected The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this sampling interval 5 19 5 rmon alarm The rmon alarm global configuration command configures alarm conditions To remove an alarm use the no form of this command Syntax rmon alarm index variable interval rthreshold fthreshold revent fevent type type startup direction owner name no rmon alarm index index The alarm index Range 1 65535 variable The object identifier of the particular variable to be sampled interval The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds Range 1 4294967295 rthreshold Rising Threshold Range 1 4294967295 fthreshold Falling Threshold Range 1 4294967295 revent The Even
379. x radius server retransmit retries no radius server retransmit Default Configuration The default is 3 attempts Command Mode Global Configuration mode User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the number of times the software searches the list of RADIUS server hosts to 5 attempts Console config radius server retransmit 5 5 18 4 radius server source ip The radius server source ip global configuration command specifies the source IP address used for communication with RADIUS servers To return to the default use the no form of this command Syntax radius server source ip source no radius server ip source Specifies the source IP address Default Configuration The default IP address is the outgoing IP interface Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines To define an out of band IP address use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Example The following example configures the source IP address used for communication with RADIUS servers to 10 1 1 1 Console config radius server source ip 10 1 1 1 5 18 5 radius server timeout The radius server timeout global configuration command sets the interval for which a router waits for a server host to reply To restore the default use the no form of this command Syntax radius server
380. xt gt gt Interface O Portigl Y Lac Ingress Rate Limit Status Egress Shaping Rate on Selected Port Committed Information Rate CIR Committed Burst Size CbS Update Port Ingress Rate Limit Egress Shaping Rates Status Rate Limit Status CIR cbs Figure 4 40 Bandwidth screen Queue shaping can be based per queue and or per interface Shaping is determined by the lower specified value The queue shaping type is selected in the Bandwidth screen include interface port LAG Rate Limit Ingress Rate Limit Status Rate Limit The page contains the following fields Interface Indicates the interface for which the queue shaping information is displayed The possible field values are e Port indicates the port for which the bandwidth settings are displayed e LAG indicates the LAG for which the bandwidth settings are displayed Ingress Rate Limit Status which indicates if rate limiting is defined on the interface Rate Limit 62 1000000 Defines the amount of bandwidth assigned to the interface Kbps The possible field values are 62 1000000 Kbps Egress Shaping Rate on Indicates if rate limiting is enabled on the interface Selected Port 86 User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Committed Information Defines CIR as the queue shaping type Rate CIR The possible field value is 64 1 000 000 Kbps 4 8 5 Basic Mode The Basic Mode screen see figure 4 41 contains the following fields A Coeemnicaion B
381. y chain 5 22 7 user key The user key SSH public key chain configuration command specifies which SSH public key is manually configured and enters the SSH public key string configuration command To remove a SSH public key use the no form of this command Syntax user key username rsa dsa no user key username username Specifies the remote SSH client username which can be up to 48 characters long rsa RSA key dsa DSA key Default Configuration By default there are no keys Command Mode SSH Public Key Chain Configuration mode User Guidelines Follow this command with the key string command to specify the key Example The following example enables a SSH public key to be manually configured for the SSH public key chain called bob User s Manual of WGSW 24020 WGSW 48040 Console config pubkey chain user key bob Console config pubkey key key string rsa AAAAB3NzaC 1 yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQCvTnRwPWI 5 22 8 key string The key string SSH public key string configuration command manually specifies a SSH public key Syntax key string text text Authentication string that must be sentand received in the packets using the routing protocol being authenticated The string can contain from 1 to 16 uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric characters Default Configuration By default the keys do not exist Command Mode SSH Public Key string configuration User Guidelines

Notice - PLANET Technology Corporation.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents